Digitaliseret af I Digitised by

DET KGL.
BIBLIOTEK
Royal

Danish

Library

R a s k,
'Pftïvfel\

(jratunwu-l

/

Sfatens

pædagogiske Sfudîesamlirtg
København V.

Dr. E. C. RASKS

DANISH GRAMMAR
EDITED B Y

TH ORL.

G U D M.

RE PP.

SECOND EDITION.

COPENHAGEN.
FUBI.ISHED

BY J.

H. SCHULTZ.

184G,

Statens

pædagogiske SfudiesamlSng
København V.

/fa l'if

//f fu

PRINTED BY J. H. SCHULTZ,
PRINTER TO THE KING ANI) TO THE UNIVERSITY.

Siotens

pædagogiske Sfudiejamiing
København V.,

KING CHRISTIAN THE EIGHTH.

SIRE,
1t is to YOUR ROYAL Munificence
tliat llie
second edilion of the
now

work,

MAJESTY’S feet,
iirst edition

being

existing for

a

adequately

owes

out of

second,

laid

ils appearance.

prinl,

still the

remunerate the

and

a

YOUR

For,

the

great demand

publisher

labors of

at

an

could not

editor;

so

editing would not, in all probaImd nol YOUR
hilily, have been underlaken,
MAJESTY been graciously pleased lo supply tbe
Tbe Editor
means required for ils accomplislnnenl.
therefore most humbly bopes, tbat YOURMAJESTY
will graciously reçoive tbe following most bnmble

that ilio lask of

statement, in respect
offered

lo

tbe

to his

share in tbe edition

now

public*

The füll lille of tbe first edilion

lows: ”A Grammar of tbe Danish

runs as

Language

fol-

for tbe

Englishmen, togelber witb extracts in prose
and verse. Ry Erasmus Rask, Professor and Librarian in tbe University of Copenhagen, and member

Use of

Copenhagen. 1830.” In
appeared to mc, tbat Uvo

of several learned socielies.

reediting tbis work, it
it
objects must steadily be kept in view viz. tbat
should be rendered really useful to Englishmen,
of the Danish

by exhibiting to tbem tbe structure
language in a plain and intelligible form:
at the same

time,

no

and that

material part of Professor

Rask’s system should be sacrificed ; but every respect
in the
paid lo tbe memory of tbe great linguist,

reproduction

of bis work.

Fourteen Years
and still but

(ieath,

have

now

his

öince

elapsed

very small part of lhe im-

a

provements proposed and advocated by him

improvements
Peter

wliich he

and

Syv

Höjsgaard

Nevertheless

reception.

has met with

his

general
made

arguments

great impression, and that impression is

by

from

professedly adopted
—

—

not as

a

yet

entirely obliterated. Under these
circumstances it appeared, that in point of usefulness it would
scarcely be advisable simply to
reprint the learned author’s work without any modification whatever; and this seemed the more eviany

dent

means

sinçe

even

in the

original

edition

,

Professor

Rask himself had sacrificed

some

system and

the aa, which in his

g. reinstated

e.

other works lie had

Höjsgaards

plan

part of his

discarded, adopting instead

I could therefore devise

å.

no

better

for the

stated

accomplishment of the twofold object
above, than to preserve indeed Professor

Rask’s system in all essentials unaltered;
the

own

same

time

partly in,

point

and

out

partly

by

means

but at

of notes inserted

under the text, where he

differed from the general usage.

In

some

instances

he had in faet done this

himself,

that I felt the

so

justified in adopting this plan, in a far greater
numher of places, where he had omilted to notice
more

The å 1 have

his deviation.

expunged

from the

alphabet, for in retaining it there, he appeared
did not
scarcely consistent wilh himself,' since he
malte

cept

use

in the last extract.

although

of the book

of it in any other

even

part
The Q

his adversaries,

I

reinstated, for

g. Mr.

e.

ex-

Molbech,

superfluous and
considering
useless, it still is in general use.
The English I have corrected in many places,
though perhaps not in every place where this might
it

agree with him in

The considération that Mr. B.

have been done.

Thorpe

M. A. of

of the first

as

Cambridge

edition,

made

me

read the

had

cautious in

proofs
rejecting

phrases, which although sometimes
appeai'ing to me not quite correct, had been allowed
to remain hy a Graduate of an English University
I aecordingly confincd
and a distinguished scholar.
idioms

and

my corrections

obscurily

in the

to

passages where

expression,

or

a

scemed to render them nccessary.

either

somo

manifest

error

And thus I
work

lay

before YOUR MAJESTY that

of Professor

Rask which it has been my

humble

endeavour,

to render more

without

tely expressed
their language

a

men

should

chief way

the

mation,

is in

among the Danes have la-

great deal of

If this fear be well
—

appréhension
become

gradually

founded, one
of retarding

my humble

way

knowledge of it, by means
Dictionaries, among the great
has done

mucli,

well

of the French

as

to

consum-

propagate
who take

nations

As Profes-

in the way of dissemi-

nating the knowledge of Danish
as

perhaps

of Grammars and

the lead in the progress of civilization.

Borring

a

lest

extinct.

—

such

opinion,

the

sor

part,

useful.

practically

Some learned

in any

impairing

among the French

language amongst

his

I have

liumbly endeavoured, in
various ways, not only to promote the knowledge
of English in Denmark, but also the knowledge of
Danish in England; and if these very humble efforts

countrymen,

meet,

in

so

some

MAJESTY’S most
tent

and

degree,
August

with
as

approbation, they will
satisfactory reward.

YOUR

well

receive

as

ROYAL

most compe-

indeed,

a

high

unsatisfactory and uncertain
most of the languages spoken

IIow scanty and
our

knowledge

the ancient

of

world,

the

Atlantic, because

lo

the Greeks

If

they

had

Dietionaries

few of thern

and the Romans!

through Greek

preserved

in

the Indus westward to

from
so

is

were

And

lmown

why?

—

and Latin Grammars and

any memorial of

themselves,

lliey would not have utterly perished ; or left their
identity doubtful.
That it may piease the Almiglity to preserve
YOUR MAJESTY, together with YOUR MAJESTY’S
AUGUST CONSORT, in the continuai enjoyment of
Health, Prosperity and Peace, is the fervent prayer of,

SIRE,
YOUR MAJESTY’S
most

devoted,

most obedient

and most humble servant
THORLEIER GuDMUIfDSOiY.REPP,

Copenhagen

ihc 3d December 1810,

THE AUTH OIVS PREFACE

■Nearly

30 years luwe note elapsed , since
Capt.
Fr. Schneider publislied his Danish Grammar
for
the

of Englishmen, during

use

has been made in

attempt

structure

of

the

which time

English,

Danish in

no

other

to describc the

satisfactory
English learner in acquiring
a
more
accurale knowledge of this
language;
although it has been very considerably enriched
and improved, and its Literature
greatly enlargcd
and cultivated during this
period. But even for
the time when it was
composed Capt. Schneider s
Grammar was a very imperfeet one ;
for besides
the general inaccuracy of the rules, the carelessness
of the spelling and translation of the Danish
way,

a

more

to assist the

or

,

and the ut ter tastelessness in the
arrangement and
the
is
appearance of
text, it

words,

totally

devoid

of system.

follows

a

system,

Still, if
as

in

the

language ilself
faet every language may

X

be

PREFACE.

supposed

to do

or

,

il

could not be

spoken by

whole nation, thal system should appear in the
Grammar, or the Grammar mast be acknowledged

a

to be

déficient in the most material point, its chief
abject being to exhïbit a view of the system of
speech adopted by the nation. This system, howis

seldom

evident in any

language, that
there mag not be formed tnany different ideas of
il, and consequenlly many different plans may be

ever,

laid doivn

for

die,

grealest part
as

Grammar

also

the

of the

same

Frisic

Grammars which I have
structure

of

one

That which I have here

language.
the

a

so

of

all

these,

as

same

adopted is, for

that

and

and the

of the Icelan-

the

Anglosaxon
The internal

published.

and indeed also

of

the other

languages of the Gothic stock, appear s to be
nearly the same, though less evident in the Danish
than in the ancient

idioms; and it may afford

an

assistance to the learned

exhibited
to those

inquirer, to find them all
from the same point of view. But even
udlo merely study the language , in order

to be able to read

a

book in

it,

or

conversation , it will be convenient to

to

use

it in

find a true
and tolerably complété system of infection and
formation of words in the Grammar; for althougli
the study may appear easier, if the Grammar offer
merely some loose or detached remarks , together

PREFACE.

icith

XI

mriety of examples;

a

y et

this is

merely
knowledge

the

concealing
difficulty, mailing the
finis acquired déficient, and,
consequently the roud
mach longer, as it
obliges the learner by dint of
long expérience and use to deduce the rides himself, for tchich he vainly seelts in lus Grammar.
,

As to the nature
to

Grant

In

it agree

find

in

so

of

closely

his Grammar

order, however,

this

system,

uith that

1

am

happy

of Mr. John

of the English language.

not to irrite

large and crabbed volume on an easy and
elegant tongue, I hâve
carefully omitted reasoning about the system and
the terms of Grammar.
In the syntax, I fear, I
have been rather too short, but this
defect may
be
in
a
new
easily
supplied
edition, shonld this
in
be
so
first essay
any way
happy as to meet
tcith the

a

encouragement of the public.

of Christiania has

published

Mr. Hansen

separate treatise
of Danish Grammar. Perhaps also
an
explanalion of the old poetical forms may be
missed; in the notes however the reader will find
the most remarkable
difßculties of this description
explained. In Order to be short in the notes, I
on

have sometimes marked

of

a

this head

the words

tor is

by

a

the

grammatical property

fraction, of

which the

intended to indicate the declension ,

jugation,

and the denominator the

dass,

numeraor

con~

or

sub-

XII

PKEFACE.

division , to which the word
that the

(J-)’ signifies
loivs the

,

inflected

likewise .befaler

I

befaler,

first dass,
love, p. 40, and
With
much
tve

so

Dame, lady,

regard

to the

the

p.

1S;

ver b

jex>

first conjugal-

like

inflected

to the

jeg- elsker,
this

Literature,

speak of

translations

now

that

/

on.

too limited lo

have

like

command, belongs

ion ,

'Tjeneste

y.

common

({)’ signifies
and is

c.

Tjeneste, service, foldass, or is, in

noun

first declension,

respect

every

belonys ;

is

place

it to any purpose ;

of

man

y

célébrât ed

of English and American authors, as: Shakespear, Fielding, Sir Walter Scott, Cooper, Washington Irving fyc. which may afford an easy and

tvorks

agreeable introduction to the
Ihough translations in general
recommended lo learners.

thorough knowledge of the

Danish
are

Literature;

scarcely

Those who wish
Danish and

be

to

for

a

Norwegian*)

Throufjhout the kingdom of Noricay the Danish language
ihough pronounced with a pectdiar accent is used to this dag in
speaking and writing in the pulpit and in public affairs of every
description Several natives however, since the union with Sweden
seem to
pride themselves parlicularly on calling it Norwegian, nor
is it to be denied thal, eten before the celehrated Holberg, the
Norwegians had an honorable skare in cullivaling and improving tt;
but thai ils tvhole present form originaled in Denmark is an histori
*)

,

,

,

,

,

,

♦

,

-

cal faet

heyond dispute

espccially

♦

about the lime

From hence it was propagaled to Norway
of Luther's Reformation, uhen Literature
,

PREFACE,

lion in

1S14 , may

till

a at hors

xm

find sufficient informa-

Nyerup's ff Kraft’s dansk-norske
But

lexicon.
the hest

a

hook which presents
in the

authors,

with

rature, together

branches

elegant

,

should

be

provided,
eller

Læsebog

It mag

is

IL

L.

Exerapelsariiling

the most celebrated authors

Danish

Rahbek’s

danske

in 2 voll. S vo

.

naines

of

Danish Grammars,

wrote several works

Syv

their

of

to add the

of

of

of Lite-

copions specimens of

be proper still

The Rev. P.

view

a

and with which evert/ learner

writings

Literatur-

on

this sub-

jeet with great skill, and eonsiderably improved
the

orthography, though his opponents strove very
hard lo defend the ffu instead of v (e. g. hafFue
for bave) and the diphthongs, ia, ie, ay, ey 6fc.
Hofsgård discovered the true system of the ten
vowels, and proposed the method of denoting them
with single characters now again adopted by those
who care to dislinguish them.
He also wrote a
Grammar and a Syntax in separate volumes.

and

learning

in

were

in that country

into rustic dialects

or

made to translate the

pamphlet
sermons

either
or

promulgated

for

icorhs
in

a

very low state, and

and the old Norse

,

or

of

holy Scriplures

Jlence

no

into Norse ,

the catholic party

instruction &. éducation

Norwegian after

totally

greally corrupled

provincialisms,

against

almost

thal time

♦

altempt
nor

was

ever

polemical

any

published

compiléeh

cxlinct

and dissolvcd

,

vor

nor

any

any law

XIV

Still

PREFACE.

célébrai ed

more

Prof. J. Badens Forelæsninger over det danske Sprog, of which four
editions hare appeared.
This n as the first regnlar and complété Grammar of the Danish
Langnand
is
still
one
the
best,
age,
perhaps
of
existing.
Abrahamson
wrote
a
Capt.
very elaborate Danish
Grammar for Germans, also of great merit; and
Diclman

treatise

are

Orthography and a Gramperhaps
philosophical a style.
S.
N.
J.
Bloch
Prof.
published a Grammar for
schools together with a treatise on Orthography,
in which he differs from his
predecessors, admita

on

in rather too

mar

the

ting

diphthongs

and

many

mute vowels and

consonants, but the second vol. of his Grammar,
intended for the syntax never appeared. Prof. L.
Nissen wrote another Grammar

Prof.
many

for schools,

also

F. H.

Guldberg. Besides these there were
smaller Works published for schools, amongst

which Thonboe’s and Benzien’s

markable: the former lias been

limes; of the latter

appeared
also

as

a

this

a

are

the most

reprinted

the

is

several

second edition has

being
last,
the
best of
syntax,
perhaps
;

re-

and

recently
containing

the smaller

works.

Finally, I have to apologize much for my
English stile, 1 ought not, perhaps , to have hasarded writing a book in this
language, nor was it

PREFACE.

my intention
The

do

to

bookseller,

when 1

so,

who

XV

the

was

Schneiders Grammar ,
pare

a

new

of Capf.

orener

wishetT

merely
that
work,
of

edition

the work.

began

me

to pre-

which I

thouglil
presumption;
but I was soon convinced
the
ritter
of
fault iness*)
of the Grammar, and consequently of the necessity
might

be undertaken

of almost writing

a

cheerfully mending
seller,
to

when the

begin,

without great

new

the old

the

howecer

the book-

edition

new

was

idea, thinking my alterations

mueh too many and too liazarded
In order

on

work, until

printing of

gave up the

I went

orie;

or

mnecessary.

not to lose the time and labor

therefore

in

preparing the most difficult part of the
manuscript, I found myself obliged to look out for
another bookseller, to undertake the publication,
as
a
book of my own, leaving al the same time
Capt. Schneider'’s work entirely out of sight, as
far as could be done without rewriting the manuscript. If, after all these changes , the text of
sperrt

the reader may demand

*)

merely ejuote

the

first line

28 letters in the Danish

tely following
ter ,

A,

contains

to

a

only 27.
:

proof of

this hard

censure ,

where the aulhor States that

alphabet

is thus described

iruth is the very reverse,

given

,

for the broad English A
♦

are

though the large table immediaThe pronuncialion of the first let-

,

"Like the broad A in all ^

this letter in Danish

I shall

there

is

a

wall.”

The

sound

never

XVI

PRFFACE.

Ute book still rends
in

rirent

and
mar

tolerabhj

measure, he indebted

learned translator
,

well. Ute reader will

Mr. B.

Thorpe,

tedious business

Ihroughout

of

mg

who

for

,

it to Ute alle

Anglosaxon

(iront-

kindly undertooh Ute
of correcting one of Ute proofsheets

Ute volume

,

PART I.

ORTHOGRAPHY.

The

1.

Danish

FIGURE

NAME

Danice

A,
B,
c,
D,
E,
F,
G,

or

a,

b,

—

c,

—

d,

—

e,

—

f,

—

21, a,
33, b,

A,
Bé,

6/ c,
% b/
<s, G
s, f,

Cé,
Dé,
E,
Eff,

9'

—

g,

H, b,

—

I, i,
J, i>
K, k,
L, I,
M, m,
N, n,

consists of

alphabet

twenty

seven

viz.

letters,

—

—

—

—

—

—

*) lu

& i),
s, »,
s, h
£, b
S, 1,

Gé,
Haa,
b

a»,

m,

Jod,
Kaa,
El,
Em,

%

«/

En,

the

names

POWER

Anglice
in

Ah,

a

Bey,*)
Cey,
Dey,
Ey,

b.

French é

Eff,

f.

Ghey,
Haw,
Ee,

g in go, give.
h aspirated.

Yoth,
Kàw,

y consonanth.
k.

El,

1.

Em,
En,

m.

fatlier, part, far.

s

and

d

hard;

ee

in

k,

as

in

English.

and th

fiat, as in thus.
fermé & é ouvert
.

bee, i in bill.

n.

of the letters the Danes pronounce é like the
or like
English ey in the word

French é (with the acute accent),

they.

The former of these

with the Danish
in the

Danish

spelling;

two’columns gives the names of the letters
the latter gives the same names spelled

English way, so as to lead the English learner
pronunciation of these names.
1

to the
bd.

right

2

ORTHOGRAPHY.

Danice

0,

P,

Q> q,
R, r,
S, s,
T, t,
U, u,
V, v,
X, x,
x, y,
Z, z,
Æ, æ, _—
O, er,
Ö, ö,„
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

in more, for.

0,

o

Pé,
Ku,

Pey,
Koo,

P-

Er,
Es,
Té,
u,
Vé,
1, x, Ex,
g), Pr Y,
3/ bf Zet,
m, «, x,
0,
£>, 3,J 0,

Er,
Es,
Tey,
Oo,

r.

Vey,

v

0,

% p,
Qy Cl,
% X,
©,«/
s, t,
U, u,
% »,

—

Anglice

0,

D,

or

o,

POWER

NAME

FIGURE

Dr. Rask omitted the
and

superfluous

hard.

s

t.

in

oo

fool,

in vein,

u
w

in

füll.

in howl.

x hard.
Ex,
'•) in
pur, nul.
u,
z.
Set,
a in sale, ai in said.
Ai,
Eu, (prend.) fermé in peu.
Eu, (French) ouvert in veuve,
œu in cœur, œuf,

Remarks

2.

q-

alphabet,

and declared

Q,

useless, but

the

on

even

préjudiciai

it

to be ”not

to

a

merely

faithful represen-

language, by obscuring the origin and affinity of words,
derived from Kone, wife; bekvem,
g. Kvinde, woman,” he said, ”is
convenient, from komme, to corne, (Fr. venir); Kvarter, a quarter
of an hour, is also called Kortér; Kvast, tuft, is originally tbe
as the
same word as Kost, broom; and kvæle, suffocate, the same
therefore
is
”The
he
added:
And
justly rejected
Q
Engl, kill,”

tation of the
e.

P. Syv, as also by the learned Prof.
Sproglære Odense 1817. It is howbut always followed by v, never by u in
Qvinde, beqvem, Qvarler, åfc.” [Christian

by the celebrated Grammarian
S* N. J* Bloch in his Danske
ever

still nsed by

some,

any Danish book, as:
Molbech in his Danish

perly speaking
and

as

has also declared

dictionary

superfluous

it is still uscd

it is here

Z,

a

,

by almost

every Danish author

introduced again into the"

z,

(Zet,
into

orlhography
by s, according

Q

to

be ”pro-

letter, but retains it nevertheless;

except

Rask

alphabet, kd.]

German
pron. sett) has crept from the
a few words, which should be written
to the true

pronunciation,

as:

Zobel,

1
ORTHOGRAPHV.

sable; zire,

3

adorn, better Sobel, sire. [Dr. Rask omitalphabet but I have reinstated it, since it is
indispensable not only in the words enumerated in Mr.
ted

z

Molbechs

dictionary,

but

also in

great many

a

nouns

ed.]

proper,

and W

Q, Z,
as

to

in the

are

used in

also the German vowels

are

characters

occurring

ought

names

å,

ü

of

foreign origin,

(for æ, y') ; hut these

not to be inserted in the

alphabet,

Dr. Rask inserted

A which
always has been used
the twenty fourth letter, in his
alphabet and
the adoption of this character
by the following remarks:
been, till the beginning of this Century,

Swedes,

never

in any Danish word.

as

by the
justified

”Å

has

commonly represented by

aa,

according

the old

to

Lowgerman orthography, but « is found
Norwegian manuscripts : it’s réintroduction,
proposed by the celebrated Danish Grammarian Hiijsgård 1743
later by Schlegel, Baden,
Nyerup, Schrejber, Thonboe &c. has, in
the last decennium, been realized in about
thirty separate
books or pamphlets by Prof. A.
Gamborg, Mr. H. J. Hansen, Mr.

in ancient Danish and

,

N. M. Petersen,

also

by the author of these pages, and several
At all events the sound is
simple, and conti-

anonymous writers.

nually interchanging with

other

simple vowels, ( a,

inflection and derivation of words,

past

tense talde or

current,

common :

e.

g.

tæller,

æ,

to

o), in the

count, in the

tolde, counted ; gå, to go, Gang, gait, gængse,
Får, sheep, is derived Færoerne, the Far-

from

Islands,
So also in kindred dialects, as
Vingård, vineyard;
Tåre, tear, Germ. Zähre; Måned, month, Gerin.
Monath; åben,

oe

opeu &c.

Whereas

be read in two

naast, the
find

aa

for

name
«

aa

syllables
of

a

in most

is sometimes
as:

Danish Prince.

printed

it convenient to preserve that

Æ,

like

long

a,

sometimes

even to

Haarlem, Aaron, Kanaan, Knud HaAs the learner however will

books hitherto

published,

we

think

orthography in the succeeding pages”.

A, represents

a simple vowel
sound, and
separated or resolved into ae, which make
distinct syllables, e. g. bejae
(be-ya-e), aft'irm.

must never be

0 and O are
commonly confounded, so that 0 is
used for both sounds in books
printed in the Gothic type
i) in those in the Roman character. The distinction
proi*

4

ORTHOGRAPHY.

as it will
posed by.Hôisgârd, shall be adopted here,
in
recollecting the
greatly assist the student’s memory
the
above
alphabet 0 and Ö
genuine pronunciation. [In

have been coünted for

3

letter.

one

Of

ed.]

Pronunciation.

The double Sound of sorne of the letters may create

difFiculty.

sonie

The open
as

is

e

exactly

Herre, gentleman, like

like the œ, but usually short,
The è fermé, or

værre, worse.

close e, is very frequent in Danish, but not of frequent
words as :
occurence in English ; still it is found in such
from:
Sound
a
different
tlière,
vein, veil, which have

their,
vain.

exactly like
Kaag, boiling, like
the aa, bul is generally
where the Engo
is
often
The
close
used,
Bog, book
:
as
Broder, brother, &c. [The
lish has the open one,
than the English and has
close
Danish close o is more
to Walker’s 2 d o, in
a sound more nearly approaching
In

with

analogy

this,

the open
short as,

o

sounds

ed.]

move.

general their close sound at
long or short, e. g. tre,
syllables,
three; lé-ve, live; Ko, cow; troværdig, crédible] fri,
free; Skri-ve-ri, (continuai) writing; synes, seems; yderY have

E, O, I, U,

in

whether

the end of

mère,

moreover.

tions,

as:

There

are

however

few excep-

Sté-det, the place; Bô-gen, the book; vi, we;

gudelig, religious (book),
these because

sound, most of
to the
belonged
originally

have the open

the consonant

preceding syllable.
For

sonie

cases

in which the

syllable

sonant, scarcely any certain rule

terminâtes in

can

be

a con-

given, although

the open Sound is perhaps the more frequent, e. g. trende,
three (to each); Konge, king; vinde, to gain; Guld, gold ;
But in
golden; especially before ng, nd, Ig, Id.

gylden,
Ord,

a

word; Norden,

the

North,

the 6 is

long.

Med,

5

ORTHOGRAPHY.

with, for, for, have the open short sound; in ved, by,
the e is close, although it be short; and in stor, great,
the ö is close.
Sometimes
before

this rule

e,

i,

u

are

consonant in the

a

applies only

doubled when
saine

long or close
syllable; unfortunately.
where the consonant

to the cases,

following is l, ni, n, r, or s, e. g. FUI. arrow, but hvid
(never hviid white; and not even regularly to ail the cases
nientioned,

e. g. Viin, vvine, but min, mine, the
pronunciation in both cases being exactly alike (viz veen, meen).

As

soon

words,

as

a

vovvel

added in the inflection of the

is

the

arrows;

doubling ceases, as : Pilen,
Vinen, the wine, Vine wines.

danger,

that

into distinct

though

very

necessary,

the arrow,

Pile,

As there is little

the reader should divide these ee, ii, m,
shall preserve this orthography,

syllables, we
imperfect, as

the most common; andin cases
used, assist the learner, by

where it is not

placing accents over the vowels, (') for the close or
long sound and C ) for the open or slender, as in French,
There are no diphthongs in Danish, but aj, ej, oj,
uj, oj, even though written by some ai, ei, oi, ui, oi,
are pronounced with the
open sound of the vowels and
a distinct y consonant
following, never like ai, ei French
or
the
e.
ui,
oi,
like,
g. ej, not, sounds like Engl, eye or
I ; Konvoy, a convoy, like the verb to convoy, &c. Perhaps however the j is a little softer after the wovels
than at the beginning of words. Even after g and k it is
soft, e. g. begjére, desire ; kjédelig, tedious ; like the Engl.
guardian, cure, &c.
In like manner av, ev, in, oc, œv, oc are pronounced
as

clear vowels followed sometimes

sonant, sometimes by

a

w;

the

v

by

a

distinct

v

con-

also is softer after

the vowels than at the

beginning, e. g. tac, was silent;
Brev, letter ; stiv, stiff ; Tôv, cable ; Ræv, fox ; døv, deaf.
The sound of
consonant

is

particularly observable, when another
follows, e. g. tavs, silent; Evropa, Europe;
w

6

ORTHOGRAPHY.

stiften; hovne, to swell; Hævn, revenge; sovnig, sleepy, drowsy.
Likej & v some other consonants have also a softer
Sound after the vowels than before them, thus d sounds
like dh, Anglosaxon and Icel. Ö, or Engl, flat th in bathe,
when it concludes the word, or is placed between two
vowels, also when doubled, as lâd, lazy, sluggish ; Fader,
father; vædde, lay a wager, &c. After l, n, r, it is
scarcely perceptible in the common pronunciation, except
stime,

to

peculiar empliasis on the vowel preceding, [e. g.
Stald, stable is pronounced stall; Mand, man pron. man;
Bord, table pron. boor (where oo sounds as in floor). ed]
G in similar cases has also a softer sound, which
was formerly written gh, e. g. Sag, cause, aft'air, conas

a

cern;

tage, take.

Sometimes after e, ö it is pronounced
y cons.), e. g. eg in jeg, I, sounds quite

j (or Engl,
ej, in Vej, way; and ög in Dögn, a day and night,
like öj in lwjne, to heighten.
[H is not aspirated in Danish before j (in stead of
which Molbech alvvays writes ï), or v, e. g. Hjelp, help,
aid, pron. yelp; Hvalfisk, whale, pron. Valfisk; hvid,

like

like

white, pron. veeth.

ed.]

English sounds of j, ch, sh, th
foreign to the Danish language.

sharp

The

rely

4

Of

.

In Danish there
of

pronouncing

four

of them

examples of
languages :
the

long

the

are

are

accentuation
six accents

vowels,

are

1) the tvailing
2) the advancing
3) the abrupt

the short

are:

(Tonehold)

long

1) the rolling

2) the running

3) the rebounding

not

as:
—

—

—

—

—

enti-

.

or

modes

short,
apply, but

and three

easy to understand and to

the other two

are:

three

are

easily

found in other

oh!

oral.

(pro-noun ?)
worthy, love.
torrent,

ORTHOGRAPHY.

7

The

rebounding is the abrupt shortened, butitmust
by oral instruction; they are both very frequent in Danish, and very difficult to foreigners.
The abrupt takes place in almost ail long monosyllables as: Bârn, child; Been, bone; Bi, bee; Blôd,
biood; Ur (Uhr), Avatch; sky, shun; Trœ, tree; de, die.
The rebounding in many short monosyllables, terminating in consonants, especially nd, ng, Id, Ig, rg. Ex.
kàn, can; Kam, comb; hèn, away, up to; slèm, bad;
Skind, skin; ond, evil; ung, young; Hyld, eldertree;
Bælg, husk, bellows; Sorg, sorrow. But many others
have the running accent, as: han, he; rank, slim, tall;
be learned

Ven, friend.
The

advancing (or obtuse) is usual in pronouncing
dissyllables or polysyllables, as : hårnchildish;
agtig,
benig, bony; more, divert; Fure, furrow;
lyde, obey; taale, endure; være, be; fore, carry; Hjörne,

long

vowels in

corner.

The

running (or sharp) is usual Avith short and
sharp vowels in dissyllables, especially before double
consonants, as: Klasse, dass; hellig, holy; ikke, not;
begge, both; Odde, point of land; Fusker, bungler; hyggelig comfortable; tækkelig, neat; Borste, a brush;
,

Smörrebred, bread and butter.
The trailing and the rolling occuç but rarely; the
former mostly in interjections and contracted monosyllables, as: a! ah! o! oh! Fa’r, father, Mo’r, mother;
the latter especially Avhcn a short vowel is folloAved by
rd, as: myrde, to murder; værdig, worthy; sometimes
Id produces the same effect, but never v as in English.
As to the position or place of the accent (Tonefald-et), the Danish also diflfers widely from the English.
In words of northern origin, the first radical syllable
usually bears the emphasis, as: væsentlig, essential; Gjérrighed, avarice; tf delig, evident; betydelig, considérable;
Ubetydelighed, insignificancy ; Rentekammeret, the Danish

B

ORTÏIOGRAPHY.

exchequer; but we also find:
retfærdig, just; København,
agtværdig, worthy
Copenhagen ; Bornholm, Kristiansståd, Frideriksddl, Hof-

board of revenue,

the

or

of esteem;

mansgåve, &c.
Words

derived from the Southern

languages

have

last, as: Karavån, caravan, Bibliothekår, librarian; Karaktér, character; Filosofi, philosopliy; Religion, religion; Sekretær, secretary; Direktør,
often she stress

on

the

director; Natür, nature; diatematik, mathematics, &c.
When the french e mute is preserved in Danish, it never
receives any emphasis, but sounds
end of Danish words, en Terràsse,
rassé ;

Artikkel, article

But

&c.

like short
a

terrace,

e

at the

not Ter-

usually it is thrown away
according to a false
confound the learner, by

sometimes written

entirely, though
orthography, serving merely to
disguising the true pronunciation.
5.
There is

a

Of

the

spelling.

orthogreat dispute amortg the Danish

spelling foreign words. As
the Italians write tesauro, the Spaniards accion, the French
caractère, monarque, the English Bachelor, author, analogy
&c. entirely disregarding the Greek and Roman usage, soit
seems but just that the Danes should be at liberty, to
spell such words in their own writings according to their
In faet Prof. Bloch in his Dan. Gram.
own pronunciation.
has adopted f for ph, as Filosof, philosopher; and it is
about the

graphers

pretty

manner

of

write, Monark, Mekdnikus, Maskine &c.
adopt also the t for th, though less frequent,

common to

We shall

being very apt to mislead
Matemåtiker, Mathematician. It

the th

the

English student,

common also
g.
this
it
has
Sound, and only
to write k for c, whenever
like
c where, according to ifs name, it sounds

e.

is very

preserve

s, e. g.
ner

Akademi, Specier.

As to the division of words into syllables, the learthe premust observe, that j is always referred to

9

ORTHOGRAPHY.

ceding vowel,
ced short and

which is in these

sharp,

other consonants

cases

are

when

single; or divided
lowing,
and succeeding vowel, when more
taken to

except

in

but

constantly pronoun-

g. Vej-e, ways, not Ve-je. The
usually referred to the vowel fol-

e.

between the

preceding

than one, no care being
the radical parts from the accessories,

distinguish
compound words,

e. g. Dage, days, from Dag,
foretell from for-ud, beforehand,

for-ud-si-ge,
sige, tell, say.
Though the Danish orthography is doubtful in many
cases, yet the leading principle is evidently to express
the sound as nearly as possible; and, where the sound
the
may be expressed in two different ways, to adopt
e.
the
with
most
that
skærpe,
g.
etymology,
agrees
spelling,
to sharpen, from skarp, sharp, not skjerpe, althongh it
would express the same sound; skjenke, to pour in, from
Icel. skènkja, Germ, schenken, not skænke, because not
derived from Skank, shank. Saald (Såid), a sieve, because the verb is sælde, to sift, not Sold, which is an-

day,
and

other word, meaning wages,
Soldat, a soldier.

or

soldiers pay, from whence

Before a, aa, o, u, e, the consonants k and g are
always hard, as in the English words cote, gown, and in

produce the sound in cure, guard, a j must be
inserted, as en Skjald, a bard; en Kjole, a coat; skjide,
conceal; gjaldt, was worth, cost; Gjéd, goat; gjorde,
made, but before æ, ö, ø, y, i, k, and g take always the
order to

sound, and no j should be inserted, as: kær, dear;
(Lat. carus), Kön, sex, gender, (Lat. genus)’, København,
Copenhagen; but many people, not being aware of this
rule, will insert the j even in these cases, and write
kjær, or kjer, Kjön, Kjebenhavn &c. It is however acknowledged to be erroneous, to insert the j, when the primitive is a Danish word, which has ka, ko, ku, ga, go, gu
without j ; e, g. at kjempe or kjæmpe for kæmpe, to fight,
combat, w ould be a fault, because the primitive is Kamp

softer

,

10

ORTHOGRAPHV.

combat ; in the same manner \ve write kæmme, to comb ;
a comb ; skod, shot, from at skyde, to shoot,
and et Skud, a shot; gød, poured, from gyde, (Germ.
from Kam,

kjæmme, skjod, gjød.
great advantage in Danish orthography, that
is written with a capital letter at
substantive
noun
every
the beginning, as numbers of words. else perfectly alike,
are thereby easily distinguished at the first view. *) Ex.
not

goss),

It is

(en)
(en)
(en)
(en)
(et)

a

(al) tale, to speak,
(jeg) Sör, I must, ought,

Tale, a speech,
Bör, a barrow,
Tro, faith,
Fliij, weathercock,
Önske, a wish,

tro, faithful,

fliij, flevv,
(at) önske, to wish,
(at) rande, to watcr.
Vande, waters,
On the other hånd adjectives of national naines

are

to the

written with small

Enginitials, contrary
dansk, Danish; norsk, Norwegian; svensk,
Swedish; hollandsk, Dutch; engelsk, English; angelsaksisk, Anglosaxon.

usually

lish usage,

Those

as:

who

wish to

analysis
principal points

see

and of the

of the Danish

an

of the sounds

of this usage which the Danes and Norwe-

*) The advantage

have borrowed from the Germans is not felt

gians
ged by the

rest of

of it’s ortho-

or

acknowled-

English, the French, the Spaniards,
Italians, the Greeks, the Arabs, the Persians,

mankind

:

the

Portuguese, the
Armenians, the Russians, the Polacks, the Bohemians and the
other Slavonie nations, the Magyars, the Turks, the Swedes, the
Finlanders and the Icelanders spelt all words in the same way
without distinguishing any by a capital letter excepting nouns
At one time it was attempted to introduce the German
proper.
fashion in England, and in many English books printed in the reign
of George I and George II the nouns often have capital initials ;
but this practice has now become quite obsolete. Thus it is evident
the

the

the Danes und

that the Germans with their imitators
have in this

particular

been left in

distinction between verbs and
this

practice

shews

is

of

no

plainly enough

very small

a

alledged

nouns

great moment,

whether

a

given

since

word is

to

the

Norwegians

minority.
be

The

affected by

context

a noun or a

always

verb.

ed.

11

ÏNFLECTIOIV.

graphy, rnay consult the author’s essay; ”Fors»g tïl en
videnskabelig dansk Retskrivningslære med Hensyn til
Stamsproget og Nabosproget, Kebenhavn 1826”, published
as the first volume of
Tidsskrift for nordisk Oldhyndighed.

PART II.

IN ELECTION.
6.

Properly

the

speaking

articles, (Kjendeord) form no
speech, being all originally pronouns,

peculiar part

of

but

nouns

as

ticle,

They

many

ARTICLES.

are

never

used

without

some ar-

of them may be desireable.
sometimes combined with the nouns,

previous knowledge

a

are

moreover

and then have

a

considérable influence

in Danish

Fortunately

ders and numbers like

on

the articles also

adjectives;

the declension.

distinguish

and it

gen-

would

greatly
assist the student’s memory in
recollecting the puzzling
distinction of gender, if he would make it a rule, never
to

nor

pronounce

even

to think of

proper article.
The Danish admits but of two
the

neu

ter

könnet);

the

( Intetkônnet) and the

a

noun

without its

genders (Kim),

viz.

( Fælles
latter including the masculine (Hankoncorn mon

-

net) and the feminine

(Hunkönnet); but even these
formerly distinguished, there being three genders (neut. mase. & fem.) in the old
mothertongue, the
of
which
traces
are
left in the structure
Icelandic,
many
of the modem
language.

two

were

The numbers

(Talformerne) are the usual two,
singulär (Entallet) and the plural (Flértallet).
There

are

three articles in

Danish,

one

the

indefinite

(ubestemt) and two definite (bestemte), the,une
nouns substantive, the other for
adjectives.

for

12

IIVFLECTION.

The

before

indefinite article

merely

of the neuter, and

a noun

gender,

common

has

it has

no

en

tvvo

forms,

before

plural. Being
pronounccd with

close,

com.

Land,
country,
Lande, countries,
The definite article of
et

neuter,

é

short.

Ex. neutr.

sing,
pluv.

of the

derived from

the numéral eet, een, one, it is

though

viz. et

one

en

in the common

Stol, a chair
Stole, chairs.

en

a

substantive is et in the

nouns

gender, and -ne (ene) in the
is pronounced with open è in

piur. of both genders; it
the sing., and always added as an atfix to the nouns, as :
Stol-en, the chair,
sing. Land-et, the country,
piur. Lande-ne, the countries, Stole-tie, the chairs.
It is derived from the demonstrative pron. hint (Icel. hitt),
hin, pi. hine, that, y on;
The def. art of adjectives is dét in the neut. dén
it
in the com. gend. and dé in the piur. of both genders ;
a separate word, as:
as
the
before
is always placed
adj.
the fine (country),
sing, det skönne (Land),
the fine (countries),
piur. de skönne (Lande),
the old (chair),
sing, den gamle (Stol),
the old (chairs),
de
(Stole'),
gamle
piur.
This last article is nothing but the demonstrative
.

pronoun; but when used

as

article it loses all

an

em-

phasis.
7

.

NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE.

Of

Gender.

Danish, as in most other languages, it is impossible to give perfectly satisfactory rules for the gender
be
of nouns: the following observations may however
In

useful to the learner.
Neuters

are

1) the

ies, metals and letters,

names
as:

of countries and

det

cit-

frugtbare Danmark,

13

INFLECTÏON.

fertile

London, fine London; det
Jerusalem; Paris &c. Guld, gold;
Sølv, silver ; Jærn, iron ; Bly, lead ; et stört E, a capital
E; at skrive En et X for et U, literally: to write one
an X for a U
(meaning the Roman number V), or ten
for five, i. e. to impose upon one, make him work or
pay
ny

det smukke

Denmark;
Jerusalem, the

new

double.

2) Most inonosyllabic nouns of action, formed of
verbs, without any additional termination, as: et Køb (or
Kjøb), a bargain, from købe, to buy; et Salg, a sale; et
Spring, a leap; et Tryk, a thrust; et Skud, a shot.
ïhose in ang and gt

excepted, as en Sang, a
time; en Agt, intention; en
Tugt, discipline, and a few others: en Strid, a contest,
strife; en Drik, a drink; en Hjælp, a help, assistance,
which are of the common gender.
3) Derivative nouns in -eri, as: Bryderi, trouble;
Frieri, courtship; and those in -skab signifying a situasong;

en

Gang,

a

going,

are

a

tion or relation, as: Broderskab-et,
skab, nobility, Venskab, friendship.

8.

To the

of persons and
plants. Ex.

Mand,

a

man,

en

Konge,

a

king,

en

en

Smed, a smith,
Theologi, divinity,
Hest, a horse,
Torsk, a cod-fish,
Ko, a cow,
Slange, a snake,
Eeg, an oak,
Tôrn, a thorn,

en

Adel-

gender belong 1) most names
dignities, sciences, animais, trees and

en

en

fraternity;

common

en

en

the

en
en
en

Qvinde, a woman,
Dronning, a queen,
Jordemoder, a midwife,
Logik, logic,
Gaas,

a

goose,

Myre, an ant,
en
en Kalv, a calf,
en
en Firbeen, a
lizard,
en
en Bög, a
beech,
en
en Rose, a rose,
en Tulipan, a
en Tüsendskön, amaranth.
tulip,
There are however some
exceptions to this rule, a) especially compound words, of which the last part is a
en

/

14

INFIECTION.

I

neuter;

e.

woman ;

Mandfolk,
Daadyr, a doe;

g. et

et

Pæretræ, a peartree.
6) Some Names
both sexes,

as:

et

a

Fruentimmer,
Rensdyr, a reindeer;
et

man;

et

a

et

living beings which comprize
Menneske; man (homo); et Folk,
of

k

Barn, a child; et Asen, et Æsel, an ass;
people;
Bæst, a beast; et Dyr, an animal; et Fæ, a brute;
Kvæg, (a) cattle; et Faar, a sheep ; et Lam, a lamb;
Kid, a kid; et Ned, a neat; et Hors, et Dg, a jade;
Fol, a colt; et Sviin, a swine; et Egern, a squirrel.
et

et

et
et
et

de, dàm, héd, ing, ning,
Hôjde, height; Brèdde, breadth;
en Guddom, agodhead; Trældom, slavery ; Hvidhed, whiteness; Hurtighed, swiftness; Forandring, change; Lœsning, reading; Slægtning, a relation; Begyndelse, beginning; Forkortelse, abbreviation; Indførsel, importation;
Vœxt, growth; Hugst, cutting (of trees); Skrigen, a
crying; Leben, a running, Also those in -skab, denoting qualifies, as: en Egenskab, a quality; en Ondskab,

2) Derivative

else, sel, t, st,

nouns

in:

as:

en,

malice.

3) Foreign

w

dn,

ords in -tor, ist,

on,

isme, tét.

Ex Konduktør, Rigorist, Lutherdn, Kujon (coward), Kaikön (turkey), Revision, Terrorisme, Prioritet, except et

Universitét.
9.
as:

et

Compounds
Birketræ,

a

take

the

of the last part,

gender

Morbærtræ, a mulberrymasterpiece; en Selvtallerken, a

birchtree;

et

Mesterstykke, a
silverplate; en Hovedpunkt, a main point. Except et Boga testistav, a letter ; et Maaltid, a meal ; et Vidnesbyrd,
en
en
Tid,
Byrd.
mony; from en Stav,
It is to be observed that the folio wing words change

tree;

their

of the
cl

el

significations
neuter

Ark,
Bid,

with their

gender :

a

sheet

a

bite,

(of paper),

genders :
of

the

common

en

Ark,

en

Bid,

an

a

gender :

ark,

morse),

15

INF SECTION.

Brud,

et
et

Billig

a

breach,

bow

a

Digt, a poem,
Flor, a gauze.
et Folge, retinue, train,
et Gran, a grain,
et Leje, a
couch, bed,
etLœg, a fold; dogsear(e.g.in a book),
et Lod, half an ounce,

Bftid,

en

Buk,

a
a

a

bride,
He-goat,
fiction, talc,

et

en

Digt,

et

en

Flor, prosperity,

en

Folge, conséquence'),
Gran, a pine,

et

Mode,

et

1\ôd,

et

Raad,

an

et

Skrift,
Snært,

a

assembly,

an
a

neat,

et

adviee, council,
book, vvork,

a stroke of a
whip,
Spand, a team of horses; aspan,
et Söm, an (iron)
nail,
et Ting, an assize,
et Tryk, a thrust,
et Værge, a
weapon,

et

Several words
et

Punkt,

a

en

en

Leje, hire,

en

Læg,

en

Lod,

en

Mode,

en

and

or

en

(inclination of the body),

en

Raad,

en

Skrift
Snært,

en

en

a
g

counsellor

(title),
handwriting,
the lash, cord,

a

bucket,

en

Spand,

a

en

Söm,

seam,

en

Ting, a thing,
Tryk, print,

en

en

Trold,

leg,

lot, share,

a fashion,
Nöd, need, distress,
Nöd, (sharp), a nut,

a

Værge,

of doubtful

are

point;

en

calf of the
a

a

trustée.

gender,
or

et

en

as :

Trold,

a

Punkt,
giant,

goblin.*) **)
The word et

Bogstav, a letter, was formerly of the
gender, and is still used thus in some biblical
and adverbial phrases, as: Bogstaven ihjelslaaer, men
Aanden gjör levende.
At tage noget efter Bogstaven, to
take something literally. Et Sted, a place, was likewise
common

*) The verl) folge
Company

is not

only

to

foliote,

but also

to

attend,

**) Mr. TIolbech makes
Trold ) and this has been

Trold

adopted

of the

on

his

common

authority by

gender (en
Ferrall and

in their

Repp

ac-

one»

Danish-English Dictionary. In Icelandic, however,
Troll is neuter, and such, no doubt the
gender ought to be also
in Danish, when the word dénotés a giant, or
ogre; but when
it is used as a term of
abuse, of a clamorous scold, it probably is
right, on the authority of several Danish poets to make it: en
Trold

.

BD.

INFLECTIOS.

16
of the

common

and this is

gender,

preserved

in many

in the

place (of), andensteds, else-

common

of Funen, hence in the culti-

vated

people in the isle
language the phrase:

at gaa i

adverbs, as: isteden,
where, nogensteds, anyvvhere, somevvhere, ingensteds,
En Taage, a mist, is called et Taag, by the
nowhere.

Taaget, literally: to
thoughtless, heedless,

walk away in the mist, i. e. to be
absent, not to have ones wits about

10

.

Of

The Danish

nouns

viz. the two

inflections,
two cases

the declension

(Forholdsformer)

noms.

of few

but

p. 11), and

in each, viz. the nominative
(Ejeformen) just as in

genitive
(Ncemeformen)
the formation of these
but
English;
more

of

(Navneord) admit
numbers (mentioned

and the

deal

one.

inflections is

a

good

varied.

In this

respect
declensions, the

the

nouns are

divided into two orders

simple in ifs inflection, the
The simple order contains all
other more complex.
all the
nouns ending in short e; the complex comprizes
in
rule
invariable
one
follows
former
forming
The
rest.
r
in the plural,
the numbers and cases, adding always
distinction
without
and s in the genitive of each number,
of gender; the latter is subdivided into three classes,
the first fororiginally distinguishing the three genders,
the
the
second
like
by adding -e;
sing.;
ming the piur.
table
The
-er.
may serve
the third by adding
following
:
as a synopsis of the whole system
or

Simple
Sing.

one

more

Complex

order.
N.

e

G.

-s

Piur. N.
G.

-r
-rs

dass X.

=

-S

order.

cl. 2,

=

-S

cl. 3.

*

•S
•er

-ers

But when the definite article is added, the s which forms
is removed from its place immediately behind
the

genitive

17

INFIiECTIOIÏ.

the

and affixed to the article; some rules of eualso be observed, when a final e of the
phony
noun would be
immediately followed by the e of the article.
I shall therefore exhibit the
paradigms in their
noun

must

difinite

or

in order

as

to

well

give the reader
they are

of which

inflections,

11.

Though
account

on

iwo

classes,

this

The

def.

one

or der.

simple

order forms

of the
the

compound
simple or indefinite form,
a
complété idea of all the
susceptible.

only

one

declension, yet

article it

may be divided into
for the neuter, the other for the

gender,

common

The
en

in their

as

nouns: et

Dame,

a

Hjœrte*), aheart; en Konge,
lady, shall be our paradigms :

king;

a

Indefinitely.
neuter dass

Sing. N.

et

G*

et

common

Hjœrte,
Hjœrtcs.

en

Konge

en

Konges
Konger,

Hjarler,
Hjœrters,

Flur, K.
G.

K.
G.

Pluv. N.

G.

et
et

et

et

et
et

Rige a kingdom,
Æble, an apple,
Mærke, a mark,
hafte, a promise,
Mode, a meeting,
Stykke, a piece,
,

Damers

are

en

en
en

en

en
en

,

.

Konge-n,
Konge-ns,
Konger-ne,
Konger-nes,

manner

Dame,
Dames,
Damer,

Kongers^

Hjcerte-t,
Hjœrte-ts,
Hjœrter-ne,
Hjœrter-nes,

In like

en

,

Definitely
Sing.

dass
en

,

Dame-n,
Dame-ns,

Damer-ney
Damer-nés*

declined:

Love,

a lion,
Abe, an ape,
Hane, a cock,
Have, a garden,
Fjende, an enemy,
Herre, a master,

en

Lôvinde ,

a

en

Tudse,

toad,

a

lioness,

en

Höne,

a

hen,

en

Pare,

a

pear,

en

Krone, a crown,
Stavelse, a syllable.

en

*) Molbech following the German analogy

writes Hierle

Herz).

(from

bd.

2

18

ÏNFLBCTI03V.

The final
a

e

receives the open sound (é), whenever

consonant is added.

The article loses its

original

e

(before

the f and ri)

in this declension.

everywhere

Bånde, a farmer, peasant, changes the vowel in the
plural, Bonder, Bönderne.
Words denoting dignity or rank, and ending in -e,
lose this e, when prefixed to a name, as Kong Frederik
den sjette, King Frédéric the sixth; Fyrst Edvard, Prince
Edward; Grev Bernstorff, Count Bernstorff; Herr Möller,
There are
Mr. Möller; Fru Skibsted, Mrs. Skibsted.
the word
as
to
this
rule,
hovvever several exceptions
in
female
titles
and
-inde, as
Kammerherre, Chamberlain,
Grevinde, countess, &c. which are never abbreviated.
The old form of the article in the neuter gen. sing,
of Hjærtets we say
was -ens (not ets),*) hence instead
the
Hjœrtens in sonie old phrases, as : min Hjærtens Ven,
friend of my heart. Thus also of Menneske, man, instead
of the usual gen. defin. Menneskets, we say Menneskens,
in the biblical expressions Menneskens Sön, the son of man;
Menneskens Börn, mankind. In the def. piur. we often
of Menneskerne.
say Menneskene instead

Derivative words in domme likewise often reject the
plural r before the defin. art.; e. g. Hertugdommene,
instead of

Hertug dommerne

.

be established as a general rule, that the
of -ets : it occurs only i a few words.
instead
-ens,
contracThe old form, i. e. the Icelandic form, was -ins, and by
in a. Hjærtion -ns, when the nominative of the noun terminated
of the
tens and Menneskens may be considered as faint vestiges

*) It
old form

can

not,

surely,

vas

certainly does
generally adopted;

ancient form ; but it
in

-ens

ever was

bave been the
less

frequent

case

in

since the

old Danish

use

e.

appear that the
and this is the less

not

of the definite article

g. in

15th centuries than in modern Danish.

writings

genitive
likely to

was

much

from the 14lh and
bd.

19

ÏNFLECTIOW.

Tilfælde, accident, case, and Södshende brother and
sister, do not admit any -r in the plural.
Et Ôje, an eye, forms Öjne (formerly Öjen) in the
plur., gen. Öjnes, defin. Öjnene, Öjnenes.
Et fire, an ear, forms Ehren, or -Ører, gen. -Ørens
or firers, defin. firerne (Ørene), firernes
(firenes).
En Oxe, an ox, forms in the plur. Oxer (fixne,
,

,

Øx en).
Of the
viz.

en

common

Penge,

a

gender

there

are

two

exceptions,

money, and en Lige, an
in the plur., so that the indef,

coin, medal,

equal ; which receive no r
plur. of both is like the sing., and the def. form of
Penge, Penge-ne-s ; but Lige has no definitive plural, perhaps because it might be confounded with: Lig-ene,
from Lig, a corpse.
12.

The

complex

order.

This order must be divided into three classes

ding

to the three manners of

accor-

the

forming
plural, though
agreeing exactly with the genders in the modern
language. As examples let us take et Djr, an animal,
deer ; en Dag, a day; en Sag, a
thing.

not

Lndefmitebj.
Ist dass

Sing.

2d dass

N,

et

Dyr,

en

G.

et

Dyrs,

en

Plur, K:
G.

Dyr,

Dyrs,

Dag,
Dags,
Dage,
Dages,

3d dass
en

en

Sag,
Sags
Sager,
Sagers,
9

Deßnitcly.
Sing, N.

Dyr-et,

G.

Dyr-ets

Plur. N.
G.

,

Dyr-ene,
Dyr-enes,

In like

manner are

Dag-en,
Dag-ens,
Dage-ne,
Dage-nes,

Sag-en,
Sag-éns,
Sager-ne,
Sager-nes,

declined:
2

'

lNJFIiECTIOX.

20
Ark,

et

a

sh cet,

blow,

et

Slag,

et

Baand, a ribbon,
Aar, a year,
Rôr, a rudder,
Skridt, a pace,

et
et

et

a

13

en

Fisk,

a

fisb,

en

en

Fugl,

a

bird,

en

en

Vej,

en

Slav,

a

staff,

en

Hest,

a

horse,

en

Hund,

en

wav,

a

a

en

doc,

b look,

en

Aa,

en

Sandlied, truth.

General remarks

.

Dgd, a virtue,
Frugt, a fruit,
Dronning, a queen,
Aand, a spirit,
a

.

havIn each of these classes there are some words,
which
a
ing a short vowel, followed by single consonant,
termination
a
as
soon
as
double the final consonant,
Ex, of the Ist dass
beginning with a vowel is added.
def. Karr-et, pl. Karr-ene; el Lam ,
a

vessel,
Kar,
et Sont, an iron nail, Sönim-el ;
a lamb, Lamm-et, &c. ;
a
et Led,
joint, Ledd-et; et Lod, half an ounce, Lodd-el;
Of the 2d dass en Bœk, a
et Æg , an egg, Ægg-et.
def.
Bœkk-en, pl. Bœkke-ne; en
rivulet, piur. Bække,
en Hat, a hat, pl. Halle;
Blok, a block, pl. Blokke, &c. ;

et

en Straf,
punishment, pl.
en Træl, a
Rigdomme;
pl.
riches,
Rigdom,
Straffe;
Of the
a wall, pl. Vægge.
slave, pl. Trælle; en Vœg,
a calen
Almanak,
a
nut, pl. Nødder;
3d dass en Nod,
a manufacture pl.
en Fabrik,
ender, pl. Almanakker;
Fabrikker; en Ven, a friend, pl. Venner.

en

Top,

a

top, pl. Toppe;

en

When

a

word of the

dass, it takes of

course

com.

the

gend. belongs

coin.

to the first

art. -en, &c. instead

def. & indef.

as: en Fejl,
sing.
en
a fault,
Fejls, Fejl-en, Fejlens, pl. Fejl-ene. Thus
a
crayfish, en Leg,
also en Sild, a herring; en Krœbs
en Mus, a mouse ; en Sko,
a louse;
an onion; en Lus,
eel ; but en Alen, an ell does scarcea shoe ; en Aal, an
definite article at ail.
affixed
the
Likewise,
ly admit
the
2. or 3.
to
neut.
the
gend. belongs
when a word of
it
the
case,
merely
dass, which is still more frequently

of the neut.

-et

in

the

,

takes

Ex.

the

neuter

of the 2d cl.

article without any further deviation.
et

Land,

a

country,

et

Lands,

def.

21

1SFIÆCTI0N.

Land-el, Land-ets, piur. Lande-ne; thus also et Bord,
Bordet ; et Hus (HintsJ, a house, Hus-et; et Bjærg
Of
a mountain, Bjærget-,
et Hav, a sea, ocean, Havet.

table,

the 3d cl.

Berits, a proof, def. Bevis-et, pi. BevisBegréb, a conception, idea, Begrébet ; et Papir,
a paper,
Papiret-, et Biblioték, a library, Biblioteket-, et
Universitét, a University, Universitétet ; et Venskab, a
friendship, Venskabet; et Hoved, a head, Hovedet; et
Hul, a hole, def. Hullet, pi. Huller-ne.
For the other remarks that may be required we
must consider each of these classes sèparately.
et

er-ne; et

14.
Tothis
a

The

dass.

first

those

dassbelong,besides
primitive monosyllables

already

number of

der,

mentioned

of the neuter gen-

as:
et

Been,

a

bone,

et

Bind,

a

cover; volume of

et

Brôd,

et

Folk,

et

Fr ci,

book.
a
a

et

Lav

et

Lys,

et

Laag
Liiv,

people,

et

Ord, a word,
Pund, a pound,
Sejl a sail,

et

et

Faar,
Fœ,

et

Gran,

et

et

et

Gryn, a
Hjul, a wheel,
Hörn, a horn,
Jœrn, an iron,

et
et

a

sheep,

brute,
a

et

Knœ,

et

Korn,

a

et

Krus,

a

a

a

grain,
grain of grits,

knee,

grain,
mug,

et

leaf,

a

,

et

STiaar,

et

Sprog,
Straa,

et

lid,

a

,

guild.

candie,

a

et

et

a

(Laugj,

Ioaf,
seed,

a

a

a

sherd,

a

language,

a

straw,

Sværd,

a

s

et

Staab, *)

a

et

Saar,

et

Tag,

et

Taarn,

et

Aag,

a

word,
cup,

wound,

roof,

a

a

tower,

yoke,
jade.

a

et Og, a
Krte, a créature,
Kœr, a pool.
A considérable number of monosyllabic derivatives

et

et

of the verbs, cf. p. 15, as: et Brùd,
commandment a message; et Liv,

a

’) ilolbech

writes Siob.

a

breach; et Bud,
a
life; et Hik, a
ED*

22

IWFIÆCTIOIY.

Kys, a kiss ; et Haab, a hope; et Knæk,
et Tag, a gripe; et Trin, a step; et Slag, a
a crack;
et
Ridt, a riding; from bryde, break; byde, comblow;
mand; lève, live; &c.
Some of the primitives change the vowel in the
plural, as ; en Gaas, a goose, pL Gæs, pronounced sharp,
whence the def. form sing. Gaas-en, pi. Gæssene-, en
Mand, a man, pi. Mænd-, an irregulär change takes place
in et Barn, a child, plur. Born.
et

hickup, sob;

15

.

The second dass

.

primitive neuters of this dass, as
et Brev, a letter, pi. Breve; et Blad, a leaf, Blade; et
Skib, a vessel, Skibe; et Bad, a bath, Bade; et Vand,
water, Vande; et Skab, a cupboard, Skabe; but by far
the greater number are original masculines, as ; en Baad,
a boat, (Icel bdtr), plur. Baade; en Krop, a body (Icel.
kroppr), Kroppe; en Skik, a custom, Skikke; en Dreng,
a boy, (Icel. drengr), Drenge; en Dal, a valley, (Icel.
da/r), Dale; en Bom, a bar, Bomme; en Steen, astone,
CIcel. steinn), Stene, en Stilk, a stalk, Stilke; and some
few original feminines, as en Lov, a Iavv, pi. Love; en
Sol, a sun, Sole.
There

are

some

dissyllables in el, er, suft’er a contraction in
the plur. as et Kammer, a chamber, closet, pi. Kamre,
def. Kammer-et, pi. Kamre-tie; et Offer, a sacrifice, pi.
Offere or Ofre; en Ager, a field, pi. Agre ; en Finger, a
finger, pi. Fingre; en Hammer, a hammer, pi. Hamre; en
Engel, an angel, pi. Engle; en Himmel, heaven, sky, pi.
Himle.
The def. art. rarely requires this contraction in
the sing, as: Himlen, in the acceptation providence, otherwise Himmelen, Hammeren &c.
Some

Mase. derivatives in
in the

plur.,

but

-er

do not admit the contraction

constantly reject the plural termination
affixed, as e» Græker, a greek, pi.

-e, when the art, is

23

INFLECTIOïf,

Grækere, def. sing. Grækeren, pi. Grækerne, thus also
Skræder, taylor; Væver, weaver, &c.
Some few change the vowel in the pi.
en
en

Fader, pi. Fasdre ;
Broder, pi. Brôdre ;

16

.

en

Moder, pi. Modre ;

en

Datter

(Dotter), pi,

The third dass

Döttre

.

.

contains some few primitive neuters, as et Træ, a tree,
pi. Træer; et Töj, a stuf!', pi. Tôjer; et Sted, a place,
pi. Steder-, and all derivatives in -i, eri, as et Parti, a
faction, party, pi. Partier- et Bryggeri, a brewhouse, pi.
Bryggerier ; et Bogtrykkeri, a printing-office, pi. Bogtrykkerier. Also some original masculines, as Gùd, god, pi.
Guder; en Ret, a court of justice; a dish, pl Retter; en
Le,*) a scythe, pl. Leer; en Sti, a path, pl. Stier; en
By, a town, a village, pl. Byer ; en Bekjendt, an acquaintance, pl. Bekjendter.
But especially a great number of original feminines,
as]: en Saga, an old Icelandic history, pl. Sagaer; en
Bro, a bridge, pl. Broer; en Fre, a frog, pl. Freer; en
O**) an island, pl. ()er ; en Sky, a cloud, pl. Skyer; en
Gjed, a goat, pl. Gjeder; en Bon, a petition, pl. Bonner;
en Plads, a place,
pl. Pladser; en Art, a kind, pl. Arfer;
en Ært; a pea, pl. Ærter; en Mast, a mast,
pl. Master.
Likewise all derivative nouns in hed, as: en Godhed, a
favor, pl. Godheder.
In like manner most foreign words of the three
genders, terminating in consonants, as : et Patent, a letter
patent, pl. Patenter; (en) Student, pl. Studenter; (en)

*) Professor Rask spells Le pl.

regulär;

still the anomalous

Leer which makes the word

Lee (in the

spelling
singulär number)
frequently used ; but although it would be consistent
with this practice to add a third e for the affixed def. article, and
also for the plural, still this is never done.
BD+
**) Ö is also frequently spelt Öe. ed.
is most

24

UVFLFCTIOBf.

Prest, *) a priest, pi. Prester-, (en) Kaptejn, pi. Kaptejner,
a captain (more frequently spelt Capilain pl. Capital
ner) ; Patron, pl. Patron-er; Religion, pl. Religion-er;
Basliôn-er; (en) Admirål, pl. Admirâl-er; Linial-er,
ruler-s; Veteràn-er ; Husâr-er, hussar-s; Guvernør-er
(Gouverneur-er) Governor-s; Sekretærer, Secretary;
Kollekter-er, Collector ; Invalid-er, Invalid ; Uniform-er,
-

,

Uniform-s.
Those in

or

from
in

the Latin
court of

Assessor, judge
Revisor, revisor, pl. Revisorer-,

en

a

the

remove

those with

tone;

as

Assessorer ;

justice, pl.
a

sharp

vovvel

following, as:
syllable,
saddle
(en ) Brig, a brig, pl Brig-ger ; ( et) Skaberak-ker,
cloth, caparison-s; (en) Supplik, a petition, pl. Supplikker; (en) Republik, republic, pl. Republik-ker; (en) Fregat,
man of a
a frigate, pl. Fregat-ier ; (en) Kadèt, a young
Kadvt-ter
Cadet,
(also
Cadel-ler);
military academy, pl.
a
(en) Rekrut, a recruit, pl. Rekrùt-ter; (et) Lexikon,
dictionary, pl. Lexikon-ner.
Dissyllables in el, en, are contracted in the plural.
Ex. en Kjedel, a kettle, pl. Kjedler; en Nøgel, a key, pl.
Ar tikkel, an
Nøgler; en Hassel, a hazle, pl. Hasler; en
et Æsel,
a
en
Titler;
Titel, title, pl.
article, pl. Artikler;
el
an
Væsen,
an ass, pl. Æsler; et Asen,,
ass, pl. Asner;
an evening,
a being, pl. Væsner, or Væsener; en Aften,
as
pl Aftner, or Aftener. Even sometimes in the def. sing,
en remain somein
Those
Kjedlen, Nøglen, Asnet, Aftnen.
times uncontracted, as: Asener, Væsener.
A number of words of this dass change their vowel
in the plural, as :
double the consonant

in the last

en
en

no

And,

a

Tand,

a

duck, pl. Ænder,
tooth, Tænder;

en

Stand,

an

en

Slang

a

,

estate,

Stænder;

pèi’ch, Stænger ;

*) Molbech and others spelt
analogy whatevev.

en

Ko,

en

So,

cow,

a
a

sow,

pl. Köer,
Suer;

en

Nat,

a-

night, Nœtter ;

en

Fod ,

a

foot, Fodder ;

Præst and follow in this instance
BD.

25

INFLECTION.

en

Tang, longs, Tænger

;

en

Rod

,

a

root, Rödder ;

en

Stad,

city, Stœder

;

en

Tact,

a

Xoe, Tteer ;

en
en
en

Bôd,
Bog,
Klo,

a
a

a

a

fine, Bäder ;
book, Böger ;
claw, Klöer;

17

.

en
en
en

Raa, a yard, Ræer;
Haand, a h and, Hænder;
Vaand, a wand, Vander.

General remarks.

Some nouns,

form,
plurals,

though possessing a plural in proper
sing, collectively or nearly as
Mand : speaking of soldiers, we say ”fem-

used

are
e.

g.

in the

ten Tusind

Mand,” not Mœnd, fifteen tliousand men ; even
Fod, feet, as a measure ; Fisk; fish; Lax, salmon; Steen,
stones; Mursteen, bricks, considered as materials.
Some

have

plural ; such are the names of
metals, earths, herbs, vegetables, virtues, vices, qualifies,
and several sorts of provision, as :
nouns

no

Kobber-et, copper ;

Bly-et,

Hå-et,

lead ;

Tin-net, pewter;
Leer, Leret, clay ;

Sand-et,

hay

;

Med, Melet, flowev

;

Honning-en honey ;
,

Vox-et,

sand ;

wax ;

Klogskab-en, prudence
List-en, cunning;

Stöv-et, dust;

;

Hved-en, wheat ;
Rug -en, rye ;

Ære-n, honor ;

Havre-n,

Forfald-et, hindrance, inpedi-

Oats

Skam-men ; shame;

;

ment, accident.

But in other

significations some of them receive a plural,
as: Kobhere, copper-plates; &c.
Some have no singulär number, as : Briller or Giaröjne, spectacles ; Btixer, breeches; Pantalonger, Pantaloons.
When the noun that is governed in the genitive, is
expressed by more than one word, the -s is only added
to

the

last of

them,

Kotigen af Danmarks Lande,
(possessions).
Nouns signifying inanimate substances
generally form
their gen. like the English by af, of, as :
Taget af Huset, the roof of the housc ; Masten af Skibet, the mast of
the

king

the

ship.

as:

of Denmark’s countries

IPTFLECTI01V»

26

there be

Though

more

cases

only

not

yet

terminations for

and genit. în the declension of Danish
the accusative, but even the dative

than the nomin.
nouns,

no

these two
usually expressed without any préposition;
from the nominative by the
cases being distinguished
The noto the verb.
position in which they are placed
dative
or respective case*)
the
minative usually précédés,
follows next to the verb, and the accusative, expressing
har tilthe object, takes the last place, as: Forfatteren

is

sit

egnet Dronningen

Verk,

the author has dedicated his
is the nomin. Dron-

work to the queen. Here Forfatteren
the accusative,
ningen the dat. and Verk
Latin

terminology), though

(according to the
distinguished by any par-

not

ticular termination or particle.
There are also in Danish

minations

of

cases,

some

especially

remains of old ter-

of the dative,

governed

and used in certain adverbial phraby some préposition,
out of
order
in
; af Lave, out of order,
Ex. i Lave ,
ses.
i
order
;
Tide,
settled
state, right
wits from Luv,

(ones)

in due

;

time, from Tid, time;

at

have i

Hænde,

to have

from Haand,
in (ones) hånds, i. e. in actual possession,
In such cases the prep. til,
(the Icel. dat is hendi) ; &c.

Bords, at table;
hos, lodged with, {hwsa is

to, usually governs the genitive,
til

Latids,

by land ; til Huse

the Icel. gen.

til

as:

piur.)
ADJECTIYES.
18

,

Of

their declension.

The declension of the Danish

adjectives (Tillægsord)

is very simple. Like the nouns they have botli a definite
in
and an indefinite form: the former ahvays terminâtes
nor numbers; the
e, and neither distinguishes genders
’)

Respective

Danish he calls it

case

is Rask’s

Hensynsform.

technical

term

for the Dative
ed.

:

in

27

ÏNFIiECTION.

latter

the

be

original one, it distinguishes
the two numbers and, in the singulär, the two genders,
neuter and common, in the plural it forms both genders
alike, and always terminâtes in e; consequently it is here
like the def. form, and thus all the terminations of a
regulär adjeclive amount but to three As a paradigm
let us take hvid, white, together with the nouns
Papir,
paper, and Farve, color:
to

appears

Indefinite form
Nom.

hvidt

Gen*

hvidt

Papir,
Papirs,

PI ur* Kom.
Gen.

hvide
hvide

Papirer
Papirers,

Sing,

hvid

Farve,

hvid Farves ,

Farver,

,

Farvers

.

Definite form
Sing.

Nom.

det hvide

Gen*,

det hvide

Papir
Papirs,
,

Piur. Nom.

de hvide

Gen.

de hvide

adjective

Farve,

den hvide F arves,

Papirer, Farver,
Papirers, Farvers

♦

The indefinite article has
tion of the

den hvide

no

influence

on

the inflec-

as:

godt Barn, a good child,
et godt Barns, of a good child,
en
god Mand, an honest man;
en god Mands, of an honest man
pi. gode Born, good children &c.
et

In like
s

manner

sid'

H9 l ,

ærligt ærlig-e,
,

sandt, sand-e,

are

galt, gdl-e, foolish ;

»

heelt, heel, hele, whole ;
seent, seen,

;

sene ,

slow *,

dröjt, dröj-e, lasting;
fuldt, fuld-e, füll ;

trygt, tryg-ge, sure, safe;
smukt, smuk-ke, fine;

ungt, ung-e, young;

grönt, grön-ne,

Adjectives ending
definite form in

ing

declined:

honest ;
true

;

e,

as:

-le,

in

el,

en,

er

green.

form their

piur.

-ne, -re, with elision of the

and

preced-

/

28

IjYflectioït.

gammelt, gammel, gamle, old
sikkert, sikker, sikre, safe ;

ædelt, ædel, ædle, noble ;
nögent, nögen, nögne, naked;
in -en,

Participles

reject

fundet, ftmden, fundne,

adjectives do
gend. sing, as:

com.

revet, reven,

nyt, ny, ny,

in

Some others

terminating
genders, as:
double ;

dansk, dansk-e, Danish ;

Dissyllabic participles
change this termination to
form,

as

:

a

as:

torn ;

piur,

from

lree ;

(nye), nevv;’)

radical t

sk do not

or

engelsk, engelsk-e, English;
bekjendt, bekjendt-e, known
glad, glad-e, glad ;

kort, hort-e, short;

dobbelt, dobbelt-e,

the

frit, fri, fri, (frie),

graat, graa, graa, grey;

the

revne ;

distinguish

not

blaat, blaa, blaa, blue;

distinguish

hetore the neuter t,

-n

fonnd ;

Some
the

the

;

;

in et of the Ist

ede in the

conjugation,
plural and def.

elsket, elsket, elskede, beloved.

Several

adj. terminating

any inilection

in vowels do not admit of

as:

ringe,ringe,ringe, insignificant,mean;

ædru, ædru, ædru, sober ;

tro, tro, tro, faithful ;

bly, bly, bly,

Adjectives

when used

absolutely,

bashful ;

that is without

or

instead of nouns, receive the usual terminaiion -s in the
el hvidts, en
as :
gen. especially in the definite form,
of

hvids,

a

white

(one,

man

&c.), pi. hvides, of white

hvides, de hvides (of the
hvides,
white). Also det ringes, den ringes, de ringes.
Wholly irregulär is : lidet, liden (or in both genders
lille ,) little, piur. smaa, def. del, den lille, pi de srnaa.
a definite
Meget, megen, much, has neither a piur. nor
Cônes);

def.

det

den

.

form.

to give these
a very common practice
plnrai. Mr. Molbech e. g. has in his dictionary
and nye which Prof. Rask has put only in a
graa pi. graae ; frie
1
think, always written in the plural of these adparenthesis is,

*)

a

It is bowever still

mute

jectives.

e

in the

29

INFLECTION.

19

Of

.

the

degrees of comparison.

The

qualities denoted by the adjectives may be of
degrees, and these degrees are sometimes expressed by terminalions.
The posi tive
degree (den fürste Grad) is the adjective itself, of which we have treated already. The
comparative (denhüjere Grad) is expressed inDanish
by adding er c the superlative (den höjeste Grad)
by adding -est, as: hvidere, hvidest, kortere, kortest.
The comparative does not admit of
any further inflection, being indéclinable, like the positives in e (as
different

•

ringe,

e.

g, el lærd- ere Fruentimmer

,

a

more

learned

lærdere

Mand, Dame &c. a more learned
man, lady &c., lærdere Personer, more learned persons ;
in like manner def. det lærdere, den
lærdere, de lærdere.
When absolute, it may however (like
ringe) receive the
s in the
genit. case, as : en lærdere, pi. lærderes, def.
den lærderes, de lærderes.
The superlative distinguishes Ihe def. form from the
indef. by adding e, but is otherwise indéclinable. The
indef. form is rarely used except as an absolute
predicate after the verb, as: Sneen er hvidest, the snow is
(the) whitest ; hvem var höjest, who was (the) lallest; it
never occurs in the
plural. The def. form is like the
def. positive, as: det hvideste Papir, den hvideste
Farve,
de hvideste Vægge; det lærdesle Fruentimmer, den lærdesle Mand, de lærdesle Personer ; gen. absol.
del, den,

woman,

en

de hvide s l es.
In like

manner are

regularly

formed:

syg~t, syg-ere, syg-est ;

gal-t, galere galest ;

sand-sandere> sandest ;
dröj-t, dröjere, dröjest;
fuld-t, fuldere, fuldest ;

seen-t, senere, senest ;

kort, kortere, kortest-,
glad, gladere, gladest ;

,

tryg t, tryggere, tryggest ;
smuk-t, smukkere, smukkest;

fri-t, friere, friest;
ny-t, nyere, nyest.

30

INFLBCTIOjV.

the

Those contracted in

contracted in the other

positive degree are also
degrees, as far as they admit these

forms. Ex.

sikkcr-t, sikrere, sikrest;

ædel-t, ædlere, ædlest;

&c.

beskjeden-t,') beskjednere, beskjednest, modest;
Derivative
in the

(not est)

adjectives in ig
superlative, as:

and

lig

admit

,

only

ærlig-t, ærligere, ærligst, honest; værdig-t, værdigere,

-st

vær-

digst, vvorthy ; &c.
The

following

are

irregulär

in their

degrees:

piur., flere, fleest, many;
god-t, bedre, bedst, good;

lang-t, længere, længst, long;

mange

ung-t, yngre, yngst, young;
stör-t, större, störst; great;

ond-t

j

r" 1
ev ‘k
væl,e
lidet, -en, mindre, mindst, small; stem-/)
old ;
smaa, (piur.), smærre, ( smærrest) ; gammel-t, ældre, ældst,
nærmest,
near;
faa, (piur.), færre, færrest, fevv; [nær-t,) nærmere,
i

meget,

en, mere, meest,

much ;

adjectives and several others are used
positive degree, as : spansk Spanish ; islandsk,

National

only

in the

Icelandic: thus also:
heel, whole; enkelt, simple;
östre, eastern; sydre (sondre), Southern;
vestre, western; nordre, nörre, northern.

Some
and
or

some

adjectives
even

prépositions,

defective in the

are

in the compar.

ene, alone

Participles

adverbs

being originally

as:

(ned, down), nedre, nederst;
(over, over), ovre, overst-,
(ud, out), ydre, yderst-,
(ind, in), indre, inderst ;
—

positive degree,

det eneste;

very

rarely

forrest ;
(for, fore)
behind)
bagerst-,
(bag,
fårst-,
(for, before)
sidst ;
(siden, afterwards)
mellemst;
(mellem, bctween)
—

—

—

—

—

admit the inflection of degree,

but in order to express the same ideas, they take before
them meer (mere) more, in the comparative, and meest,

most, in the superlative
’) Molbech

an

as :

others Write beskeden.

BD.

1
31

INFLECTION.

godgjôrende, charitable,
elsket, beloved,

drukken , drunk, meer,

skjelöjet, squinting,

godgjôrende ;
elsket;
drukken;

meer, meest

meer, meest
meest

meer, meest

skjelöjet;

A diminution of

degree, having no appropriate termination, is always expressed by prefixing the adverbs
mindre, less, and mindst, least, as :
mindre, mindst hvid-t, less, least white
mindre, mindst syg^t, less, least sickj;
mindre , mindst

mindre,

mindst

;

elske-t, less, least beloved;
drukken, less, least drunk, &c.

PRONOUNS.
The

20.

Stedord),
tive

case

personal pronouns, (personlige
as in English, have also an objec-

in Danish

(accusative and dative),
genitive, as:

but

sometimes de-

are

fective in the

Ist persoa.

3d person.

2d person.

recipr.
S. Nom.

du, tbou,

jeg, l,

dig, thee,

Object, mig, me,
Gen.

*

s

vi,

we,

I, you,

Object,

os,

us,

eder

Gen.

vores,

P, Nom.

ours,

of

mase.

hang he,

fem.

hùn

she;
sig, ham, him, nende, her,
hans, his, hendes, her,
s

-

,

(jerj, you, sig,
eders(jer). yours,
*

*

-

Ï

s

;

i

The piur.
han, hun, is supplied for both genders
by de, dem, deres, being the piur. of the demonstr.
Selv, self, is used as in English to make the two
Ist pers. reciprocal, as : mig selv, os selv, &c. it is also
frequently added to the nominatives of all three personal
pronouns and to the recip. in order to make them more
expressive, as : jeg selv, I myself ; vi selv, we ourselves ;
sig selv, himself, themselves. Han selv means also the
master of the house, hun selv, the lady of the house,
pi. de selv, master -and mistress. But selv is never added
to the genit.

/

INFIiECTION.

32

recipr.

of the

of the two first persons and
the posform of the third is supplied by

The Genit.

21.

sing-,

sessive pronouns (Ejestedord),
like indef. adjectives, thus :

are

com,

of the Ist pers.

mit,

2d pers.

dit,
sit,

min, mine, my, mine;
din dine, thy, thme;

—

recipr.

Even from the
of the Ist pers.
—

—

2d pers.

recipr.

,

sin, sine , its, his, her

plurals possessives

own.

formed thus

are

:

vor, vore, our, ours;

vort,

(jérl),jer, jere,

jour, yours ;

sin, sine, their

sit,

the

use

own,

disputed,

The last however is much

commonly limiting

declined

piur.

neut.

—

rians

which

of sil,

theirs.

the Gramma-

sin to those cases,

but being derived from
where the nominative is singulär;
it
allowed to be used also of a plural,
sig, which is
thus
the same right, and
to have just Claims to

appears

it is used in Icelandic

and

Swedish,

and

even

often-

the
times in Dantsh authors, especially
sua,
snus,
word suum,
Latin use of the corresponding
it.
the extension we have given
seems to

the elder.

Nay,

justify

like the Engl.
with
connection
vort, vor, in
ours, but the possessive
used
like our : but eders is commonly
The

nouns

Gen.

vores

is used

absolutely,

substantive

in both

cases

by authors,

so

thal jért,

jer, rarely

occurs

but in common conversation.
is used

Eget, egen, egne, own,
procal possessive, corresponding
j

as

to the

own, vort eget,
g. mit eget, my
own.
hendes
egtie, her
egen, liis own,

selv x

e.

a

sort of reci-

personal recipr.
our

own, hans

also

gender of the third person,
are supplied by the'demonits plural in all genders,
det, den,
strative pronoun (bestemmende Stedord)
22.

The neuter

which is thus declined.

as

33

INFLECTIOIV,

Sing.

neut.

com.

Nom.

det,

den ,

Obj,

det,

den ,

Gen.

dets,

dens ,

Piur. Nom,

The

dem,

Gen.

deres.

of this

piur.

versation to

de,

Obj.

word

used in

is

single person,
lish you, and in this case it
capital letter for the sake of
a

common

con-

like the

to

several,
Engalways written with a
distinction*): De, Dem,

or

is

Deres.
But in

like

the

connection with

def.

of the

art.

substantive it is declined

a

from which

adjectives,

distinguished merely by
peculiar
when used demonstratively thus :

stress

a

Sing.

Nom.

dèt

Gen*

dèt Bôrds r
dé

Börde,

dé

Gen*

dé

Bordes,

dé Stoles ,

denne ,
hin ,

saadant ,

saadan ,

sligt,

slig,

samme, same, is
form of and old

as

than these

pi, disse, this;
hine ,

that;
saadanne,

—

—

—

slige,

such ;

such ;

like the other demonstrs

Only,

termination -s, when

genit.
dettes, hins, saadamies,

') The capital letter
it would be held to be
in

have

indéclinable, being properly the def.
demonstr. sam-t, though often used

without the article.
receives the

no more

Stôle,

remaining demonstratives
inflections, viz.
hint,

emphasis,

dèn Stôls ,

PI ur* Nom*

dette ,

or

dèn Stål,

Bord,

The

three

it is

is

an

sammes

considered
insult

to

addressing another person, with
originally German, for the Germans
with a Capital.

as

,

it

standing absolute,

&c.

a

mark of respect, and

write this pronoun, when used
a

small letter.

This fashion is

also write ”Sie” and "Ihnen“
BD

3

IÎVJFLECTIOjV.

34

(henvisende Stedord)

Relative pronouns

23.
are:

in the nominative without
der, who, that, used only
and
nuinber;
distinction of gender
used both as nominative and
that,
whom,
who,
sont,
and number.
of
object, but likewise without distinction gender

Both

interrogative (spörgende)

and

relative,

are:

in

hvad, what, used of things, and hvem, (formerly
the

nom.

sometimes

hvo), who, whom,
as

a

of persons, the latter

even

plural;

hvilket, hvilken, pi. hvilke, which.
To

the
all these relatives and interrogatives
is hvis for both numbers;

only

abs.

genitive
is

hvordant, hvordan, hvordanne, how (Lat. quale, is)
or genitive.
scarcely ever used in the objective
2!. Indefinite pronouns (nbestemte Stedord)

are:

der, it,

or

with

subject*,), especially

it is

han kommer hertil,
der

Corning hither;
is scarcely anybody
man, one,

finde sig deri,

perfectly indefinite
at
passive verbs, as: der siges
he
lis
that
said, or they say

there, which expresses

a

one

a

som

næppe nogen
who believes it.

er

troer

det, there

French ow), as: manmaa
must put up with it ; man taler meget

person,

(the

sense
uses the term ”Subject” in the
the German grammarians ; but which
with
has
frequently
calls "Subject”, the English
known in England. What Rask

*) Professor liask often
which
is little

it

Grammarians always call "nominative”.

A Dane asks: "Hvad

he must express the

English
Subjectet i denne Sætning?’’
is the nominative in
question thus: ”What
In

lish scholars

are

so

little accustomed

to

this

er

same

proposition?” Eng-

the continental school
I think

that they would,
”subjectum grammaticale”,
than "subject”,
understand the Greek term, vTTOxsifitvnv,

,

better

term

sive of that notion wich

they

use

to

call

"nominative.”

as

expiesed.

1
35

INJFLECTIOiV.

derom, they speak much about it.
used

nominat.

as

or

This word is

in the

subject;

sometimes say

En, one, instead

Ens, speaking

of ourselves.

of

objective

it, and

merely

case we

in the gen.

pi. nogle or nogen, some; a ny ;
pi, somme, some people ;
intet, ingen, pi. ingen, nothing, nobody, none;
alt, al, pi. alle, all, every ;
hvert, hver, («ithout a pi.) every; also ethvert, enhver;
ingenting (ingen Ting), nothing; alting, every thing;
et andet, en anden,
pi. andre; another, somebody else;
noget,

nogen,

(scmtj

s

this last word
its form,

as;

is

also

used

det andet

Bord,

Hinanden,

each

hverandre,

one

definilely

without

the other

changing

table, &c.

other, speaking of two;

another, speaking

of

a

greater

num-

ber.
25.

The

numéral

(Talordenej

pronouns

are

of two sorts, viz.
a) cardinals ( Mængdetal );
1. eet, een, one,

det

2. to, two,
3. tre,

i.
5.

b ) ordinals

three,

—

8.

aalte

9.

ni, nine,

—

(otte),*) eight,

ti, ten,
11. elleve, eleven,
12. tolv, twelve,
14»

other,

The

niende,

éllefte,

—

tolvte,

—

thirteen,

usual

tiende ,

—

fjorten, fourteen,
femten, fifte en,

*)

—

—

10.

15v

sjette,
syvende,
attende, [ottende].

—

7. syv, seven,

spelling certainly

tre die,
fjerde,

femte,

—

six,

13. tretten,

andet, den anden,

det, den

fire, four,
fem, live,

6. sex,

( Ordenstal).

det, den forste,

trettende,

—

fjortende,
femtende

—

—

,

is

”

otie

”

and Molbech has

Prof. Rasks

unciation and

no

spelling however is supported both by pronetymology, the Icclandic word being ”dtta”, bd‘
3*

36
16.

INFIiECTION.

den,

sejslen [commonly sexten],

det

sixteen,
17.

sylten, seventeen,

18. atten,
19. nitten,

—

eighteen,

—

nineteen,

—

—

20.

tyve, twenty.

21.

een

30.

tredive, thirty,

40.

fyrretyve, forty,

one

og tyve, twenty

&c.

~

sejslendc [commonly
tende].
syttende,

sex-

attende,
nittende,

tyvende,

een-og-tyvende,
twenty first,

—

trêdifte [commonly tredivte], thirtieth,

;
—

50, halvtrés , halvtr ésinds-)

—

tyve [commonly halv-) fifty,

)
tredsindstyve],
tresindstyve, [commonly

60. 1res,

tredsindstyve

'

fyrgetyrende, fortieth,
halvtresindstyvende [commonly halvtredsindstyvende], fiftieth,
tresindstyvende sixtieth,
,

and tredsinds-

tyvende,] sixty,
70.

80.

halvfjèrs,

1

halvfjersindslyve,

1

firsindstyve ]

100,

Cl

—

'

)

halvfems
halvfemsindstyve /

1000.

—

n * ne

^’

firsindstyvende

,

eightieth.

halvfemsindstyvende, ninetieth,

Jmndrede, hundred,

101. hundrede og eet,
200.

seventieth,

’

)

firs,

90.

halvfger sindstyvende,
se ' ent ^

—

—

een ,

hundrede, two hundred,
tusinde, thousand,

to

—

—

hundrede, hund red th,
hundrede-og-forste, &e.
to hundrede, two hundred,
tusinde, thousandth.

halvtrés, très, halvfjers, firs,
absolute, or
halvfems,
in
counting; the
without a noun, consequently applied
with
longer forms, halvtresindstyve &c., in connection
The abbreviated forms,
are

used when the numéral stands

nouns.

hundrede, tusinde, being originally nouns
substantive, are sometimes written with a capital letter,
and the indef. art. as : et Hundrede, et Tusinde, or abbreThe words

Hundred, et Tusind.
En Million, a million, Billion, Trillion, &c.
such.
nouns substantive, and constantly used as

viated,

et

There

are

also

some

other numéral nouns,

are

as:

also

37

1NJFLECTI0N.

el

Par,

et

Deger,

a

Suées,

en

Some
tives

by

couple,
a

a

pair,

a

dieher:

a score

brace;
et Dosin,

;

numéral

en

01 , four

stiled

are

score.

score.

multiplie a-

Grammarians, viz.

enkelt, single, simple;

dobbelt, double;

tredobbelt, triple ;

firdobbelt, quadruple,

But there

are

once, twice, thrice,
the noun Gang, time, with

of them

constantly use
prefixed,

we

cardinal

a

&c.

adverbs in Danish like

numéral

no

instead

as

Skok, three

adjectives

the Latin

dozen ;

a

en

ordinal

or

:

fürste Gang, the
anden Gang, the

Gang, once,
Gange, twice,
tre Gange thrice.
een

to

tredie

,

We

even

say:

two at

Gangen,

a

ad

Gangen,
time, cf*c.

The fractions

een

thus

are

halvt, halv, halve, half,
■

1

H

is read
—

en

—

1

n
2

—

—

—

S
1

—

¥
—

¥
3

—

4

is

expressed

second

time;

the third time,

at a time ; to ad

one

regulär adj.

a

,

:

indef. & def.

halv,

halvt andet, halvanden ,
or

—

Gang

first time ;

eet og et halvt ,

halvtredie ,

or

to

halvfjerde

or

tre

en

een

,

een

og

en

og

eni

og

halv

en

halv )
halv

;

&c.

Trediedeel ,
og

en

Trediedeel ,

to Tre diedele ,
en

to

tre

Fjerdedeel
Fjerdedele ,

,

Fjerdedele,

&c.

VERBS.
26.

Introductory

observations.

The inflection of the Danish verbs (Gjerningsord)
is very simple, and like that of the English ; we distinguish however an active and apassivevoice (Hand-

'

38

INFLECTIOIV.

leformen & Lideformen), but the latter is always form ed
by merely adding the termination s or es.
The verb itself has, properly speaking, three modes
viz. the indicative (den fremsættende Maade); the
Optative (den önskende) and the imperative (den
bydende); besides the derived forms: the infinitive
(Navneformen), and the participles (Tillægsformerne), being two as in English, and of the same denoThe indicative has two tenses (Tidsformer),
minations.
viz. the present (Nutiden) and the past (Datiden),
the other modes and forms have only one tense each.
The present and past of the indicative and the passive
the verbs.
partie, are the most important parts of
these inflections,
of
formation
the
to
With respect
Orders
into
two
(Hovedarthe verbs are divided
great
more simple and regulär, the other more
the
one
ter),
complex and irregulär; each of them however is subdivided into différent classes according to the formation of
the past tense of the indic. active. The simple order forms
in de
only one conjugation, it always terminâtes the past
one
than
more
syllable; it
or te, and has consequently
the past, &
in
has three sub-classes: the Ist trisyllabic
terminating in -ede; the 2d dissyllabic, and terminating
in te (or de) ; the 3d also dissyllabic, and terminating in
de (or te) but changing, besides, the vowel in the raIn the complex order the past tense
dical syllable.
is always monosyllabic having no termination, or affix,
but ending in the last radical letter, and usually changing
the vowel. It may be divided into two conjugations, the
of the present
one usually preserving the original vowel
other
the
changing the vowel
in the participle passive;
in the participle.
also
but
not only in the past tense,
also
three sub-classes
has
Each of these conjugations
The followaccording to the vowels adopted in the past.
the whole
ing synopsis may give the reader a view of
system :

39

IÏÏFLECTI01V.

The

order

simple

Ist

or

conjugation:

past.

part.

klagede,

cl* 2*

jeg klager,
jeg brænder,

cl. 3,

jeg fölger,

fulgde, *)

klaget, complain ;
brændt, burn ;
fulgt, accompany;

pres.

cl. 1.

The
cl, 1,
cl. 2,

jeg leder,
jeg faar,

cl. 3«

jeg

brændte ,

pass.

complex order, 2d conjugation.
(bedt), pray;

bad,
fik,

bedet

lod,

ladet , let;

faaet, get

;

[commonly faaer ]
lader ,

The od
cl. 1.

slap (pi. slappe ),
(— reve),
(— bude),

jeg slipper,

cl. 2.

jeg

cl* 3.

jeg byder ,

river,

or

other
the

-en,

escape ;

revet,-en,

tearj

budet,-en,

invite.

only distinguished by the pronouns
words added, never hy peculiar terminations ;
two numbers are often formed alike, or con-

founded in

are

conversation,

common

hed in the written
The

sluppet,

rev

The persons

even

conjugation.

when

even

distinguis-

language.
has

imperative

mon

no

the second person

nan

in either number.
The

bers

or

passive

voice admits of

persons, but

27.
As
I love ;

paradigms
jeg hörer,

merely

no

distinction of

num-

of tenses and modes.

first conjugation.

The

of this
I hear ;

order let

us

I

jeg lægger,

take, jeg elsker,
lay, which are

thus inflected.

no
*) Rask and some other authors Write ’Tulgde” which,
doubt, is etymologically correct, for the Icelandic has fylgdi
”

”

Molbech however writes

spelling.

’’fulgte’’

Modern Danish

than to Icelandic

etymology

hence Danish "fulgte”.

and such

looks much
:

certainly

more

the German has

to

is the usual

German analogies

”folgte”

in the
bd.

past.

40

INFLECTIOIV.

The active voice.

Indicative mode.
Ist dass

elsker,
Plnr, elske,

Pres.

Sing.

Past. Sing.
Plur.

2d dass

3d dass

hörer,

lægger,
lægge,
lagde,
lagde

höre,

elskede,

hörte ,

elskede,

hörte ,

Optative
Pres.

,

mode.

Sing.

elske !

höre !

Plur.

elske !

höre !

lægge !
lægge !
mode.

Imperative
Pres,

Sing.

(du)

elsk

2.

hör,

læg

hörer,

lægger,

Plur. 2. elsker (/)

,

Derived forms.
(at) elske.
elskende,

Infin.
Partie.

(at) læggt

(at) höre,
hörende,

,

The

passive

læggende

,

voice.

Indicative mode.
Pres.

elskes,

hores,

Past.

elskedes,

hörtes,

Optative

or

Imperative
höres,

elskes,

Pres.

Derived
Part.

(at) hores,

Sing.

elsket,

hört,

Plur.

elskede

hörte ;

;

Of the Ist dass

28.

mode.

lægges,

forms.

(at) elskes,

Infin.

lægges,
lagdes,

(at) lægges
lagt,
lagte

9

*

are:

vander,

vandede ,

vandet,

water ;

strander,
vanter, )

strandede,

strandet,

strand ;

væntede,

væntet ,

expect ;

henter,

hentede,

hentet,

fetch ;

agter,

agtede

agtet,

intend ;

arbejdet,

worlt, &c.

,

*

arbejder

arbejdede

,

•) There

is

according
spelling vente is
vante

,

no

,

doubt whatever that Rask is

to the

Icelandic

barbarous*

elymology

v œ n

right

t a.

in

The

writing
common
KD *

T
41

ISTFiiECTION.

of this dass

verbs

Sonie

three consonants

having

vowel, preserve the final e in the sing, of
the imperative, as: handle som du vil behandles, do as
you will be done by; forandre kun det, you had better
after the first

alter

that, (not handl, forandr).
Verbs that have

no

consonant after the first vowel

of three sorts, viz.
1) those in ter, ùer are wholly
in
throw
those
2)
away the e in the pi. of the
fer,
regulär;
are

3) the rest are monosyllabic in
pres. and in the infin.
the pres. tense throughout, and in the infinit, thus:
bie,

biede,

biet ,

wait ;

sue,

suedc,

suet,

suck ;

flyer,
skyer,

fly,')
sky,

flyede,
skyede ,

flyet,
skyet

y

shun ;

snér 9

sne,

sneede 9

sneet,

snows

tér,

te,

teede,

teet ,

show ;

bôr,

bo 9

boede ,

boet

tror,

tro 9

troet ,

believe ;

naar ,

naa,

troede,
naaede,

naaet,

reach

saaer,

saa,

s aae de 9

saaet,

sow;

strör,

stro9

ströede,

ströet,

strew.

bier,
suer

,

Of the 2d dass

29.

flee ;

;

dwell ;

,

;

are:

tænker ,

tænkte ,

tænkt ,

think ;

taber,

tabte,

tabt ,

lose;

kjender,

kj endte,

kjendt,

know ;

vender ,

vendte 9

vendt ,

turn :

lærer 9

lærte,

lært ,

learn,

volder 9

voldte 9

voldt ,

occasion ;

Several verbs

are

infleded either

teach

according to this,

or

the Ist dass ; in such cases the contracted or shorter form
of the past is the mostusual, a s: jeg kalder, I call, kal-

dede,

or

hældede

kaldte, called; hælder, incline,
hældte; taler, speak, talede, or

or

*) Molbech
stroe ;

writes

flye, skye,

but in aii these the final

e

snee,

or
pour
talte.

in,

lee, boe, hot, naae, saae,

is mute.

kd .

hyfeectioiv.

42

give this dass -de in the past, as :
this appears to
horde, folde, felt, tœnkde, tabde, &c., but
the best usage.
and
common
the
pronunciation
be against
in the past,
-de
have
verbs
Some irregulär
really
viz. har, pi. have, havde, haft, have; vil, pi. ville, vilde,
forms in the
villet, will, har, being contracted for haver,
has no paspassive haves ; but vil, being a neuter verb,
Some authors

sive voice.
döe, dö,
skje., *)

shjér,
30.

inflected

doet,

döde,
skjede,

According

die,

happen.
skjét,
to the rules for the 3d dass

are

:

kvæler ,

livalde ,

kvalt,

sufldcate;

tæller,

talde,

talt,

count ;

vælger,

valgde

valgt,

choose;

vant,

accustom ;

vande,

vænner,

siger
bringer

,

sagde
brag de,
saalgde,
,

,

sagt,

say;

bring ;

smear

træder,

traadte,

bragt,
saalgt,
traadt,

smörer,

smurde,

smurt,

spörger,

spurgde,

spurgt,

ask;

fölger,
dölger
flækker,

fulgde
dulgde
flakte,

fulgt.
dulgt,
flakt,

attend ;

sælger

,

,

,

,

,

rækker,

rakte,

strækker,

strakte ,

seit ;

tread ;
;

conceal;
cleave;

reach;

rakt,
strakt,

Stretch ;

thatch;

tækker,

lakte,

takt,

vækker,

vakte,

vakt,

awake ;

satte,

sat,

set.

sætter,

[Molbech
certainly write

and the

quæler

greal majority of Danish authors

,

quälte,

vænner,

vante,

bringer,

bragte,
solgte,
spurgte,
fulgte,

sælger,
spörger,

fölger,
) Commonly skeer, skee.

bd.

solgt,

43

IIVFLECTIOIS.

,

dulgte

tæller,

talte ;

dölger

,

butj Rask, who endeavoured to establish a system of orthography founded on etymology, has Icelandic analogies
always in remembrance: the Icelanders say ven, vandi;
sei, seldi; spyr, spurdi; fylgi, fylgdi; tel, taldi tyc. which
no doubt led Rask to adopt d in preference to t in the
tenses of these verbs.

past

ed.]

considering this as a regulär
past: kvælede, tællede, væn-

Some writers, not

in the

dass, prefer saying
nede, rækkede, strækkede, tækkede, vækkede; but as this
trailing formation cannot be extended to all cases, nobody
saying vælgede, sigede, spörgede, sættede, nor to the
participles, so as to say kvælet, tællet, &c. it appears
rather to destroy the real regularity, than to introduce
any.

talde, talt, we say also taalde, taalt, and
ought perhaps to be recommended, being
to
sælger, saalgde, and distinguishing the word
analogous
more clearly from taler, talte, talt; with the verb, taaler,
taalte, taalt, endure, there is little fear of a confusion,
these two words being used in totally different combiInstead of

this formation

nations.

There

dass,

are

however

some

Sing.

Plur.

Past.

Part.

gjör,

yjöre,

gjorde,

gjort-e,

tör,

tör,

torde ,

tordel,

tör,

tör,

tùrde,

turdet

hör,

bör,

bürde,

bürdet

*) This distinction
to
no

real

of this

irregulars

\iz.

need,

is not

turde, turdet
Icelandic

.

—

—

gjöre ,
tordej

make, do

tur de ,

need

dåre ;

;*)
ought;

burde ,

dåre, and tör, turde,

Molbech in his dictionary has,
but only one form of the verb: tör,

observed,

senses,

Of course,

port, pordi ;

at
—

between tör, torde, to

generally

doubt, the various

Infinit,

Rask dérivés his tör,

but lår,

turde,

torde,

from the German

from the

dürfen.

INFIdECTION.

44

Infinit.

Part.

Sing.

Piur.

Past.

maa ,

maa ,

maatte,

maattet,

kan

kunne ,

kunde,

kunnet,

skulle,

skulde,

skullet ,

vide,

vidste ,

vidst,

9

skal,
veed ,

The
common

at
—

—

—

maatte,

can

skulle ,

sli all

vidt,

know.

partie. tordet turdet burdet,
conversation contractée! to tordt
,

,

,

5

are

;
;

often,

türdt, bûrdt

»

conjuration.

The second

31.

must ;

kunne,

paradigms may serve giver, give; faar,*) gef,
inflected.
drager, draw, pull; which are thus
As

The activ voice.

Indicative mode.

Piur.
Past.

Sing.

9av>

Piur.

gave,

Optative

mode.

drage

faa,

give.

Pres.

Pres.

Sing.

Piur. 2.

drag,
drager,

faa,

giv, (du),
giver (I),

faar

9

mode.

Imperative
2.

drager,
drage,
drog,
droge,

faar,
faa,
fik,
fik, (finge),

giver,
give,

Sing.

Pres.

,

'

Derived forms.
Infin.
Part.

(at) drage,
dragende,

(at) faa,
(faaende)

OO give,
givende,
The

passive

voice.

Indiçative mode.
Pres.

gives,

faas

Past.

gaves,

(fikkes),

Optative
Pres.

or

gives,

Imperative
faas,

drages
droges,

,

mode.

drages,

*) This verb has with Molbech and other authors a mute
passive voice, viz. faaer, faaes <fcc.

both in the active and the

BD.

e

1
45

INFLECT10N.

Derived forms.
(at) gives,

(at) faas,

(«0 drages.

Sing.

givet, -en,

faaet,

PI ur.

givne ;

faaede

draget, -en,
dragne

In fin.
Part.

The

participle passive

♦

;

créâtes some

sometimes formed in et in the neut.,
in the
sometimes merely used

as

piur.;

in

form)
formed

sing,
conjug., in -ede,

To the first dass

32.
in

in Ist

following list,

the

also the

com.

the verbs enumerated

piur. of

where also the

and

gend.

these forms

or -te.

belong

whenever it differs from the

ever

piur.

shall be

sing.,
of the

partie,

the past,

marked,

kvad-eg

kvædet ,

heder ,

bad-eg

bedet, bedt-e,

gider

gad-e

gidet {gidi)

,

sing;

g

sidder ,

sad-e.

siddet g

stinker ,

stank,

stinket

beg;
like

g

;

sit;
stink

g

klang ,
hang ,

klinget,
hængt-e

gjalder,
skjailver,
falder

gjaldt,
skjahg
faldt,

gjældt,
skjælvetg
faldet, -en,

tier g

tav,

tiet ,

am

smækker ,

smak,

smækket, -de,

clap;

ligger,

laa,

ligget, -de.

lie ;

æder ,

aad,

,

ser ,

stjæler

,

skærer,
hær er 9

hang

,

saaeg

stjal ( e)g
skar-e,
bar-e,

stjaalet,
skaaret,

;

is valid

;

tremble;
fall;

-ne,

silent;

eat

ædt-e,
sét-e.

;

Sound ;

klinger ,
hænger

,

as

pass., when-

occur.

kvæder ,

,

supine (Bipiur. is

a

in et, sometimes the

the neuter

as

difFiculty, being
in the com., -ne,

en

(ofbeasts);

see ;

-eng

-

steal ;

ne 9

-en, -ne,

haaret , -en,

-

ne ,

eut ;

bear.

klang some authors write klingede; for gjaldt,
gjældte for skjalv, skjœlvede; for tav, taug or tiede,
partie, taugt.*) In saae the e final is mute both in the
For
;

*)

The great

past, tiet in

majority of authors certainly
part, pass. Taug is undoubtedly right,

Write taug in the

for the past

as

it is

ÎNFLBCTION.

46
and

sing,

merely used in order to distinguish
conjunction saa, so, then.
auxiliary jeg er, I am, is entirely irregulär,
and

piur.,

this tense from the
The

and thus inflected:
Pres. Sing.

Past.

erere

er,

Piur.

Infin.

Optative

Indicative

ere,

(at)

!

være,

Partie.

Xmperat.

værende ,

Sing.

var,

vær,

Piur,

vare 9

værer,

været ,

The second dass contains
besides the paradigm. viz.
33.

three verbs

merely

gaar,* *)

gik, (ginge),

gaaet ,

go;

hed,

am

hedder,

hedt ,

græder,

Gaar,

græd,
hedder and

gaaes, converse,
des.

The

past

am

weep,

grædt,

all,
passive
græder
is
regulär,tin
begræder, deplore,
Of gaaer there is also a regulär
have

compound verb
the pass, begrædes &c.
defective
pass, compound,

but the

called, [l am
hight, or I hight] ;
at

no

voice, viz omfamiliär with, omgikkes, sup. omgaaein the active

is sometimes

erroneously

omgikkes.
begun to use

made

have
Some writers instead of gaaet,
in the
and
gaane,
com. gend.
gaaen, in the

pi.,

but this

to the cultivated language,
lowest classes of Copenthe
and only sometimes used by
or
it has crept in from the Lowgerm.
hagen, with whom
the
in
that,

innovation

is

entirely foreign

observed however,
Dutch gegaan. It must be
mark of the com. gend., but
no
is
n
Dutch gegaan, the
the whole partie, in all genders
the formative letter of
and numbers like the

pagdi

in

Ice!,, schwieg

Engl.
in

gone.

Gerra., zwieg

in

Dutch, csigalni

Magyar. The g is
letter, as clearly appears
off at pleasure but a radical
laceo (tacui) cfce.
schweigen, aiyåoi,
is gaaer, omgaaes &c.
*) The common spelling

silent in

not a

to be

servile letter that may be cast
from

pegja

kd.
bd.

1
47

INFLECTION.

34.

To the third dass

belong:
dig;

lod-e,

ladet, ladt-e,

let,

gol, (galede'),
foer, fore,

galet,

crow

grov-e,

væver,

vov-e,

lader,

galer,
farer,

(gravede),
(vævede),

gravet, -de,
vævet, -de,

graver,

weave ;

cause ;

;

erfarer,
jager,

faret, -en -ne, go;
erfoer-e (erfarede), erfaret, -en, -ne, experience;
jaget, -de,
jog-e,
drive, chase

tager,

tog-e,

1er,

leet,
slaaet, -de,

laugh ;
beat;

staar, *)

lo,
slog-e
stod-e,

staaet,

stand;

sværger,

svor-e,

svoret -en, -ne,

swear ;

sover,

sov,

sovet,

kommer ,

kim

kommet,

holder,

holdt ,

holdl-e,

keep ;

hugger,

hiig,

hugget, -de,

hew, cut;

slaar,

,

taget,

,

-en

-ne,

-en

-ne,

;

take ;

sleep

;

come

;

But

begraver, bury, begrov, makes the part. pa
begravet, begraven, begravne; from slaar there is an old
partie, slaget, slagen, slagne; forstaar, understand, has
in the part. pass, forstaaet, pi. forstaaede.
The forms
are
and
derived
from
the Dutch
slaaen, forstaaen
false,
the
to
geslaan, gestaan, contrary
genius of the Danish.
From holder, there is an oid partie, holdet, holdén, holdne,
used as an adj., and from hugget, is also sometimes formed lmggen, pi. hugne.
35

The third

.

As

paradigms may
stryger, rub, stroke.

serve:

conjugation.
finder, find; driver, drive;

The active voice.

Indicative mode.
Pres.

Past.

Sing,

finder,
finde

driver,

stryger,

Piur.

drive,

stryge,

Sing.

fandt,

drev,

strög,

Piur.

fandt, (funde),

dreve,

ströge,

,

*) Commonly slaaer; also forstaaer vid inf.

ed*

/

INFLECTIOW.

48

mode.

Optative

drive,

finde,

Pres.

Imperative
Pres.

Sing.

2.

Piur. 2.

find-,
finder,

stryg,

forms.

drivende

,

The

stryger,

(at) stryge,

( at ) drive,

(at) finde-,
findende

Part.

mode.

driv,
driver,

Derived
Infin.

stryge,

passive

strygende.

,

voice.

Indicative mode.
findes,
fandtes,

Pres.
Past.

Imperative

drives ,

stryges,

dreves.

ströges,

Optative

or

mode.
stryges,

drives,

Pres.

findes

Infin.

(nf) findes,
fundet, en,
fundne ;

,

Derived forms.
Part.

Sing.

(at ) drives,

fat) stryges,

drevet,

ströget,

-

Piur.

-en,

-en,

strvgne ;

drevne -,

also has many irregularities or
learner to enumevarieties, it will be convenient to the
each dass.
rate the most remarkable of the verbs of
As

36.

this

conjuration

To the first dass

belong:

drukket,-en,-tie, drink ;
slukket, -en -ne, sting ;
( stunge ),
leap ;
sprunget,-en,-ne,
(
sprang, sprungé),
( drukke ),

drikker,

stikker,

springer,
tvinger,

tvang,

(tvunge),
(sange),

tvunget, -en,

-ne,

-en, -ne,

sunget,

comp el

sing

synger,

sang ,

synker,

sank , ( sunke ),

sunket,

-en, -ne,

sink ;

kinder,

bandt, (bunde),

bundet

-erø, -we,

bind

svinder,

svundet,-en,-ne, pine;*)
spandt, (spunde), spundet,-en,-ne, spin ;

spinder,
slipper
,

svandt ,

)

;

(mmete),

slap (slappe),
vandt ,

vinder ,

,

;

;

{vunde),

Am reduced, vanish.

sluppet,-en,-ne,
vundet,-en,
ed.

escape;

-ne, tvin ;

i
INFIiECTIOiV.

rinder,
brister,
fornemmer,

randt, (rundej,
brast, ( briiste ),

49

rundet,

-en, -ne,

flow;

brüstet,

-en, -ne,

burst;

træffer,

fornam, (-numme), fornummet, -en,
hjalp, (hjulpej,
hjulpet, -en, -ne.
traf, (truffe'),
truffet, -en, -ne,

hit;

trækker,

trak, (trukke),

pull;

hjælper,

trukket,

-en,

sprækker.

sprak, ( sprukke),

sprukket

brækker,

brak ,

brukket,

For

brak, trukket

according
be used

we

usually

,

a

-ne ,

burst ;

-en, -ne,

break.

-en, -ne,

brækkede, brækket,

say

to the Ist

as

perceive;

help;

conj. Ist dass. Perhaps brak should
neuter verb, brækkede as an active one.

The difference hetween this dass and the first
of the 2d
is properly that this, in the
past, has a short or
in the

sharp

piur.,

a,

conj.

which,

is

changed again to «, and this u is preserved in the
pass., whereas the Jst cl. of the 2d conj has a
long a,
which is preserved in the
piur. but in the partie, pass, is replaced
by the original vowel of the verb in the present tense. This new
change of vowel however being sometiraes
in the
partie,

neglected

of the

past, and in the part. pas9., several verbs
from this dass to the other, in which

are

consequently

are

found with

short vowel.

a

Of this

and

piur.

transferred

several words

the

like changes,
undergone, in the 13-15. centuries,
the curious reader
may find ample information in Mr. N. M. Peiersen’s del danske
norske og svenske Sprogs Historie under deres
Udvikling af Stamsproget, 1ste Del, det danske Sprog. Kh. 1829. 8.

which the modern Danish has

,

37.

To the second dass

sliber,

sleb-e,

griber,

greb-e,

kniber,

piber,

kneb-e,
peb-e,

bliver,

belong:

blev-e ,

slebet, -en, -ne,
grebet, -en, -ne,
knebet, -en, -ne,
pebet -en, -ne,
blevet, -en, -ne,

become ;

river,

rev-e,

revet,

tear ;

skriver,

skrev-e,

skrevet,

-en,

skriger,

skreg-e,

skreget,

-en, -ne,

stiger,
sniger,

sieg-e,

steget,

sviger,
glider,
viger,
guider,

sneg-e,
sveg-e,

gled-e

,

,

-en, -ne,
*

ne,

grind;
seize;

pinch ;
pipe, whistle

write ;

cry ;

ascend;
sneget, -en, -ne,
sneak;
sveget, -en, -ne,
betray;
gledet, -en, -ne, (glidtj slide, glide ;
-en, -ne,

veg-e,

veget,

gned-e,

gnedet,

-en, -ne,

-en, -ne,

yield,cede;
rub
4

;

50

INFLECTION.

svedet,

-en, -ne,

(ridt)

redet , -en, -ne, ride ;

sirider,

sved-e,
red-e,
slred-e,

skrider9

skred-e ,

vrider ,

bider,

vred-e,
l>ed-e,

( skridt)shredet,-en,-ne , proceed;
vredet, -en, -ne,
wring j
bidt-e,

bite;

lider,

led-e,

lidl-e,

suffer ;
tear ;

svider,
rider,

singe

{stridt), slredet,

;

fight,

contend ;

slider,

sled-e,

slidt-e,

smider,

smed-e,

smidt-e,

tlirow,cast,fling;

triner,

treen,

trint-e,

step

hviner,

hveen

kvint,

whine, bowl.

38.

kryber

*),

The third dass

,

krob-e ,

hröbel,

lob

lobet,

(-<?),
rög (-e),

löber,
ryger,

flyveri
byder,
bryder,
fortryder,
skyder

the

following:
run ;

-en,-ne,

smoke

}

brod-e ,

( menlior)
fly;

invite, bid

fortrudt,

sköd-e,

shudt-e,

skryder,

skröd-e,

bray

gyder,
lyder,
flyder,

göd-e,

skrydt,
gydt-e,
lydt-e,
flydt-e,

nyder
snyder,

nöd-e ,

enjoy

snöd-e,

nydt-e
snydt-e,

fryser,
fnyser

fräs (-e).
fnös (-e),

frusset,
fnyst,

gyser.

giis,
/lös,

kyst,

löd-e ,

flöd (-e),

,

9

kyser,

to the Ist

*)

The

two

last

perfectly regulär

2d

words

doubling

words

such verbs in the 2d

;

flow;
;

cheat;
freeze

-en, -ne,

;

fret ;

shudder;
frigliten;
sneeze»

past formée! according
for we say : fny ste, gy ste,

also in the

conjugation

of tlie rules for

;

obey;

O'jsl’

are

;

pour;

nyst,

The four last

ness

repent
shoot;

,

nyser,

;

break ;

fortröd-e,

,

;

lie

,

böd-e ,

;

creep

-en, -ne,

rüget, -ede,
löjet,
flöjet -en, -ne,
budct,-en,-ne budt,
brudt-e,

löj,
flëj,

lyrer,

comprizes

;

dass,

furnish

appear

conj,

e.

a

strong proof of the faultiDanish, making the

the vowels in

g.

irregulär*
feer (for),

There
saae

are

(så’)*

also

some

i:\f1iEctiojV.

kyste, nyste.

Tliere

are

also several variations of the

brudet, -en, -ne, instead
gar speech flucll for flydt, snudt
pass,

as

frusset, kosset-en
39

for

partie,
brudt; even in vulfor snydt, frosset for

of

kysl.

Auxiliary

.

51

verbs.

The verbs
possessing but few inilections, in proportion to the many distinctions of tense and
mode, which it
is often
necessary to indicate in speaking of actions with

précision, auxiliary verbs ( Hjœlpeord) are applied
nearly as in English, to form a number of additional
tenses and modes
by way of periphrasis.
The most remarkable
auxiliary verbs in Danish are :
skal, vil, har, er, faar,*') bliver; having spoken of their
inflection already under their
respective classes, \ve have
merely liere to observe, to what part of the
principal
verb they are
joined, and what modifications in its sense
they are intended to express.
Skal

and

vil in the pres. tense dénote
futurity
though not exaetly as in English. Skal

or

intention,
implies
a
duty and necessity on the part of the person; vil
^a
mere
futurity, without any personal volition a sort of
prédiction of what will happen, e. g. jeg skal skrive, I.
shall write, jeg vil
drukne, I shall drown, (if...). In the
past ( skulde, vilde), they dénoté a futurity relative to
some otlier time;
they are prefixed to the infinitive, as:
jeg skal komme i Morgen tidlig, I shall come (call) to
morrow
morning. Han sagde jeg skulde komme, he said
I
should
come o : told me to
(that)
corne, wherc I may
add i Gaar, yesterday, the action ”to
come” being future
merely with respect to ”his Orders,” not with respect
to my

relation to time.

The

past of these auxiliaries also

expresses the conditional future in
) Commonly facter.

French;

e,

g. jeg skulde

ed.

V

INFLECTIOÎT.

52

nok skrive, hvis jeg havele noget at skrive om, I would
vvrite (to him) indeed, if I had any thing to write about.
Har and

in the present to express the prevar), the pluperfeet,

er serve

terperfeet, and in the past (havde,
when connected with the participle

of the

prinheard; jeg havde
cipal verb, as: jeg har hört,
are
læst, I had read; du (De) er kommen for silde, you
come
come too late; han var ikke kommen, he was not
(arrived). The difference is, that har is used with active
all the
verbs, er with some of the neu ters, *) and with
var fundet
found
been
has
er
;
fundet
passives, e. g,
had been found; it never, as in English, expresses the
is found must be
pres. of the indicative pass., so that
rendered in Danish by findes, -was found by fandtes.

passive

I have

,

,

Faar, get ? united to the partie, pass, expresses the
I
Engl, shall have, as : naar jeg faaer skrevet, when shall
he
should
when
naar
han
have writtén,
fik Bogen læst,
da
han
but
the
fik Bogen
have read (perused)
book;
when he had got

læst,

the book.

through

sometimes combined with the

infin.,
i% order to express a duty or obligation in the person ;
as: jég har at sige Dem, I have to say (must say) to
•you; du faaer al sige mig, you must say to (tell) me.
Er

Har and

faar

is

in this way, so that the Engl. I aro
translated, jeg har at, or jeg skal, jeg maa.

never

to... must be

Bliver,
passive, as:
40.

used

am,

is

used in

often

bliver fundet, is

Two

principal verb,
har

are

(skullet'),

auxiliaries

a

periphrasis

found, blev fundet,

are

was

of the

found.

often connected with

one

as;

villet

sige, has

had

(intended) to say ;
(intended) to say ;

havde ( skullet) villet sige, had had

*>
verbs.

But these

are

always

to be

considered

as

neutro

ED.

passive

T7
53

ISFfiECTION.
til have sagt, shall, will have said’);
skulde, vilde have sagt, should, woidd have

skal,

said ;

har

haft skrevet, have had (it) written (once) ;
havde haft skrevet, had had
(it) written ;

skal, vil

skrevet, shall,

være

skulde, vilde
har været

will be written ;

skrevet, should, would Le written

være

;

skrevet, has been written ;

havde

været skrevet, had been
written;
skal, vil faa skrevet, shall get (it) written j
skulde, vilde faa skrevet, should get (it) written
har faaet skrevet, has got written ;

;

havde

faaet skrevet, had got written;
skrevet, shall, will be written ;
skulde, vilde blive skrevet, should, would be
skal, vil blive

written
blevet skrevet, has been written ;
var blevet skrevet, had been
wiitten ;
havde blevet skrevet, would have been written;

>

er

Sometimes

principal verb,

del skal have været
det skulde have

besluttet,

været

det vilde have været

det skal

added to

are

være

one

it is said to have been resolved ;

should have bceu

it

gjort,

done;

it would have been done ;
blevet omtalt, it is
reported that it was

det skulde have
det vilde

three auxiliaries

even
as:

gjort,

(tære)

blevet

omtalt,

spoken of;

it should have been

spoken of;

blevet omtalt, it would have been
spoken of ;
'det skal have blevet gjort, it shall have been
done;
være

det skulde

have**)

blevet

The reader will

locutions;

and

the sense, in
c.

guages ;

'’)
I

am

The

said

have said

**)
cause

or

a

g.

that

that there is

mcaning
reporled

seems

variety

serves

a

good

English

admirably

to

deal

circum-

modify

difFicult to express in other landet skulde have været gjort
signifies : it

(it, before

imdoubtedly

it should have been done*

manner

of this
to

have

you may

I allow this

Rask

,

observe,

in the Danish than in the

variety

more

gjort

to

have,

phrase jeg
said;
warn

skal have sagt

but han vil have

is:

sagt, he shall

him).

in the two last

have

usually

phrases,

to

remain be-

put it deliberately ; but være
to be put instead of "have.”
kd.

ought

54

IiVFLECTIOlV.

previously done, and consequently then
completed; but det skulde have blevet gjort
should have heen done after that time, implying

should have been
finished
means

:

or

it

that the person would have done it, or caused
Thus also: det skal være skrevet means:

moreover

it to be done.
it sliall be

(ready) written,

or

I shall have it written at

a certain future time, but det skal blive skrevet expresses
an assurance that it shall be written, or that I will write

det skal skrives expresses

and

it ;

a

command

:

it

shall,

So that a
written,
you have to write it.
master will say: det skal gjöres i Dag, it must be done
be

must

to

day :

or

and the servant will

answer :

det skal blive

gjort,

være gjort inden
(viz. to-day) ;
Klokken sex, it shall be done (finished) before six o’clock.
There are several other verbs used as auxiliaries,
e. g. maa, may, must; kan, can, may; tör, dåre, need;
lader
let, cause to, &c. Besides the English student
should observe, that these, as well as the auxiliaries
proper, are more complété or less defective in Danish
than in English, being used even in the infmitive, in the

it shall be done

or

det skal

,

same

capacity.
variety being modified still more by the conjuncwhen, da, as, &c. it is a Strange fault in some old

This great

tions,

naar,

Gramniars
des

paradigms
not

to

of the

mistake these circumloeutions for real tenses
verhal

inflection,

and

to

admit them

as

or

mo-

such in the

of the

regulär conjugation,
Several of the English modes of applying the auxiliaries
used in Danish, e. g.
I am writing, jeg er i Færd med at skrive;
1 was writing, jeg var ved at skrive;
I am going to write , jeg skal til at skrive;
I was going to write, jeg skulde, vilde til at skrive;
I do not write, jeg skriver ikke;
I did not write, jeg skrev ikke, (har ikke skrevet) ;
do write, skriv dog (endelig) ;
do not write, skriv ikke, skriv dog ikke ;
/ have done writing, jeg er færdig med at skrive ;
I had done writing, jeg var færdig med at skrive.

are

55

IIVFLECTION.

41.
In

Danish,

Different hinds of
in other

as

sive voice there is

a

languages

peculiar

verbs.
which have

a

pas-

sort of verbs with

passive
terminations but active signification. They are
commonly
called verbs deponent ( lideformede
Gjerningsord),
and are regularly inflected as other
passive verbs of the
and
to
which
conj.
dass,
they belong; only the Supine,
also
the
addition of the passive s, créâtes some
requiring
difl'iculty. Those of the first conj. Ist dass form the
sup. in edes,

or

ets, those of the 2d dass in

tes. Ex.

fattes, fattedes (har fattedes), want;
lykkes, lykkedes, har lykkedes or lykkeis, succeed, prosper;*)
længes, længtes, har længtes, long;
synes, syntes, har syntes,

slaaes ,

sloges,

bides, bedes,

Some

(har

entirely

are

seem ;

har slaaedes

or

bidts), bite

slaaets,
one

fight

;

another.

defeetive in the sup.

as :

mindes,

min-

dedes, recollect.
N euter verbs

(gjenstandslöse Gjo.) on the conall, as : jeg staaer, I stand ;
jeg kommer, I come ; never jeg staaes, jeg kommes.
Retlective verbs (tilbagevirkende Gjo.) are followed by the objective cases of the pronouns, as:
trary have

no

passive

voice at

jeg smigrer mig, I flatter myself,
du rober dig, thou betrayest thyself,
han bader
ri

smigre

I robe

sig,

lie bathes

os, ne

flatter

(himself,)

ourselves,

eder,

de bade

y ou betray 5 ourselves,
sig, they bathe (themselves.)

In the 3. p. care must be taken, to distinguish the
flective pronoun sig from the personal (ham, hende,

*)

When

its

Lykkes

is

used

as

an

impersonal

verb

er

re-

pi.

is used

auxiliary and not har. A Dåne certainly says: "del er sjælden lykkedes mig at faae saa god en Afstöbning.
I have rarely
succeeded in getting so good a cast. The Icelanders say : ”pat
as

hefr luckazt.’’

INFLECTION.

56

after such verbs would indicatc

dem), vvhich

fourth

a

de bade

he bathes him,
g. han bader ham,
beside the agent.
bathe
implies
somebody
them,
dem, they
From the reflective sig, must also be distinguished the
hinanden, each other, when speaking
e.

person,

rcciprocal pronouns
of two, and hverandre,
e.

de elske

g.
hinanden, they love each other;

de elske

heerandre, they

persons,

Several verbs have
and do

voice,

love

sense

not,

verbs

reflective

quoted

as

ex-

e. g. jeg
may all be used as transitives,
sotne
but
&c.
;
I do not flatter anybody

require

e.

Several verbs

are

case

another

mig,

I

in this

g. jeg betænker
English,
I
consider.
*)
betænker,

in

passive

any reciprocal
each other every

we see
g. vi sés hver Dag,
and
The reflective
reciprocal verbs

day.
amples hitherto
smigrer ingen,

in the

in that case, admit

e.

pronoun

more

another.

one

reciprocal

a

of

another, speaking

one

only

used

I présume

jeg understaar mig,
jeg skynder mig I hasten;

as

expression

hesitate,

reflectives,

but

e.

jeg

g.

;

3

The

not like to alter it.
*) This is not very clear, still I do
reflective verbs in Danish
some
are
meaning certainly is: that there
rendered
vvhich are not usually
by corresponding reflective verbs
in English, but rather by some other absolute and intransitive verb,
different from that by vvhich the general sense of the Danish verb,
.

when

it

is used

Rask gives
verb

as

an

reflective,

absolutely,
instance

must be

tænker, used absolutely,

jeg

is

coinmonly expressed,

betænker

and of this

mir/, vvhich thus used

as

a

translated ”1 hesitate”; although jeg beBut the
must be Englishcd ”1 consider”.

verb
felicitously chosen, for the corresponding
in this
exists
obsolete
rather
certainly
reflective, although perhaps
since Shylock says in the
case, and is unquestionably English,

example

is not

Merchant of Venice : ”1 will bethink me” : and on the other hand
”1 consider” or ”1 will consider” is also sometimes used to express the

sense

of the Danish

jeg betænker mig,

bd.

57

ÏNFLECTIOS.

several

others, require

a

beside the

préposition

prononn, to combine them with another
jeg
jeg
jeg
jeg
There
son

paa, I

forslaar mig

skilied in

am

objective

object,

e.

g-.

;

bestræber mig for, I endeavour;
forbinder mig til I engage ;
,

bryder mig
are

al

also,

verbs

ikke

in

om,

I do not

Danish,

care

about.

in

English,
(upersonlige Gjo.), tiras
as

many impercalled because

merely used with an indefinite nominative in the 3d pers.
sing, of the different tenses, though else formed reguîarly. Ex. det regner, regnede, (har) regnet, it rains;
det sner,*) sneede, (har) sneet, it snows; det lyner, it
Jightens; det tordner, it thunders; det tör, toede, toet,
it thaws. Many personal verbs can also be nsed impersonally, as: jeg fryser, it is cold to me, I shiver, but
det fryser, it freezes ; even so we say impersonally : det
blæser, it blows; det stormer, it storms; det gjör ondt,
it smarts: though jeg blæser, jeg stormer, are also
nsed.
Likewise man troer one believes o : they believe :
man siger,
Sometimes der, there, is prefixed
they say.
—

,

—

as

a

sort of indefinite

minative is

Tid,
is

a

a

usually

afterwards,
(gaaer)

as :

time will come; der lober

report;

and

the verb is

the nominative be
are

nominative, but then the real

added

(there be)

piur.

those

as:

even

der

ere

et

Rygte,

en

there

put in the plural, if
de

som

who think.

(people)

verbs are, at (he

no-

der kommer

mene, there
—

Several

impersonal
time, deponent, though
else active, when used personally. Ex. der siges, it is
said, they say ; der skrives, they write ; det dages it
Several neutrodawns; det mörknes, it grows dark.**)
same

,

—

*)
is

The

common

spelling

supported by etymology

(peyir),

is:

det

sneer,

det loer,

since the Icelandic has

which also

snjoar, py irir

ed.

**) These are, indeed, not verbs deponent, but grammatically
speaking, verbs passive or middle, just as dicitur and scribilur in

/
58

hyflectioiv.

active verbs have
Ex. der

nais.

passive voice, except as impersofor meget they sleep toomuch; der

no

soves

,

løbes idelig, they run (up and down)
It must still be remarked, before

continually.
leave the

verbs,
participle in -ende is also sometimes used
in a passive signification; f. i. blæsende Instrumenter,
instruments to be blown, i. e. wind-instruments ; mit ibowe

that the active

in, e. g. the liouse I live in ;
'future
part. pass. e. g. den afholdende
especially as
Avksion, (Auction), the auction tobe held; den udgivende
ende Hus, my house lived
a

Grammarians of later times,

die,

the

nor

Swedish,

published; though several
knowing the oid Icelanrejected these forms as spu-

be

book about to

the

Bog,

have

not

rious.

PARTICIPES.

42.

Under this denomination

are

generally comprehended;

(Biord), prépositions ( Forholdsord), conjunetions {Bindeord) and interjections ( Udraabsordj. Of all these parts of speech merely some of the
adverbs admit a sort of intlection, viz. a comparative and
a superlative degree, which are however usually similar
to those of the corresponding adjectives; e. g. smukt,
smukkere, smukkest, fine, pretty; höjt, højere, höjest, high;
the latter is contracted in the superlative, when prefixed
to other adv. or adj. e. g. højst dannet (Aand), highly
For the positive degree of adverbs
cultivated (mind).
adverbs

vid. p. 67.
change that character by being used imperWhen the slave says to Pseudolus ”Quid agilurt” and

Latin, and they do

sonally.
he replies
dered

as

:

”

statur

not

”

there is

verbs passive:

on

no

doubt that these must be consi-

that their comicalness

Det "mtirkner” and det "mörknes”

are two

Danish

partly dépends.
impersonal verbs

which convey indeed only one meaning viz. ”it grows dark” or
”it is getting dark”} still the former is an active and the latter a

passive

verb.

kd.

1
59

FOKMATION.

Several
ilde

irregulär

are

(slemt),
(godt),

as:

værst,
bedst,

ill, badly ;

bedre,
tiere,

tiest,

længer,

længst,

frequently ;
long, (diu) ;

meget,

mér, *)

mest,

înuch

Hjerne,
(for),

heller ,

helst,
först,

fain ;

vel

værre ,

tit

(tidt),
længe,

for,

well ;

;

prior.

PART III.

FORMATION.
43.

Ail

words

Introductory

remarks.

either

simple (enkelte), as: et Hôved,
head,
compound ( sammensatte), as en Hovedpine,
a headach;
the simple words are moreover either primitive ( Stamord ) as: rödt, red, or derivative (Afledsord), as: en Rödme, a blush, hun rödmer, she
a

are

or

blushes.
The

simple primitives are but few in every language,
augmentation by the introduction of foreign

and their

words, which is the

of all mixed

common resource

idioms, is

burthen to the memory, not affecting the understandand therefore préjudiciai to the instruction of the com-

a mere

ing,
mon
or

people ;

less mixed

whereas it is the great excellency of original
tongues, that they have the means of enlarg-

ing

the

and

composition,

fundamental stock of expressions by derivation
in such

a

must create the idea in the

reaches the

ear.

It will

manner,

mind,

also

stance to the student’s
memory in

’)

Commonly

meer.

bd.

be

as
a

that the
soon

as

new

word

the sound

considérable

recollecting the

assi-

immense

60

FORMATION.

of which a cultivated language consi,sis,
attention to the manner, in which this
whole mass is formed from the few original primitives.
In this view we shall here hriefly consider the Danish

words,

number of
if he pay

somc

derivation and

ïhose who wish

composition.

more

information may consult: Dansk Orddannelseslære
Petersen. Odense 1826.

ample
af N.

DERIVATION.
Subdivision.

44.

general Idea, e. g. of negation, détériorato he expressed, some prefixed are added to

When

a

tion &c. is

the

from

words ;
one

minations

but whenever

or

a

word is to be transferred

another, it is
speech
of
vowel, sometimes
change

part of

to

effected
even

by ter-

by

trans-

this last is how-

change,
frequent occurence in Danish than in
more
English, the grammatical qualities being in general
than in the
strongly marked on the words in the former,
these
of
latter
languages.
ferring
ever

the words without any

of much less

45.
Of

a

negative

or

Preßxes.
privative signification

are:

Engl, un- [or in-] Ex. Udyd, vicious habit;
ùv ist, uncertain; uovervindelig, invincible; uudsigelig-t,
unvvilunspeakable; ùgjort, not done [undone]; ùgjerne,
lingly; ùmager, or ulejliger, trouble (one);
Van- Vànskabning, monster, from Skabning, a créature; vandrtig, depraved; vansir er disfigure;
Mis- Misundelse, envy; misundelig-t, envious; at
Sometimes
misunde, to envy; mistrôster, dishearten.
as:
the
with
ùmiskjèndelig,
negative u,
composed again
U-

,

evident; [not

to be

mistaken].

T
61

FOBMATIOIV.

For-

fordommer, condemn; forgiver, poison; forin cutling (e. g. a gown or coat) ; forsmaaer,
en Forséelse, an
slight;
oversight; Foragt, contempt, forlegen-t, embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss. Sometimes it
merely serves to form verbs of an active signification, as
forgylde, gild; fordansker, do into Danish; or nouns of such
verbs, as: Forgylding, gilding; Fordanskning, translation
into Danish ; Forandring, change ; Forstyrrelse, dévastation.
This prefix appears to be différent from the preposition for, which is also frequently used in composition ;
in general they may be distinguishcd by observing, that,
the prepos. has the emphasis of the word, the prefix not
as: Forklæder, aprons; forklæder,
disguise; there are
however some exceptions to this rule, as; et Fortrin,
a preference,
preeminence; but fortrinlig-t prééminent.
Und- Undskyldning, excuse; undskyldelig, excusable ;
al undskylde, to excuse.
Also composed with the negative u-, as; uundskyldelig, inexcusable;
skærer, spoil

,

Veder-

Vederlag, compensation; vederfares, happen

to; vederstyggelig, abominable.
46.

Of

a

positive signification

are:

Be-

Begreb, notion, conception ; betænkelig-t, doubtful; betænksom, considerate, beklager, bewail: from klager,
complain, betænker, consider, [some of these also receive
the negative u as ubetænksom inconsiderate ubeviist, unproved.]
Bi-

Bistand, assistance ; Bihensigt, secondary design ;
biløbig, [Germ. beiläufig] by the way, obiter; bidrager,
contribute.
Sam-

Samtykke, consent; Sàmklang,
sàmtidig, Contemporary, coeval ; at sàmtykke,
usamdrccgtig, disagreeing, discordant.
Er-

harmony;
to consent;

Erhôlder, get, receive ; erkjènder, acknowledge ;
Erindring, remembrance; uerstatteligt, irretrievable ;

62

FORMATION.

An-*') Ansigt, face; et Angreb, an attack;
gribe, to attack; uanvèndelig-t, inapplicable.
Pronominal & adverbial

47.

préfixés

at

àn-

are:

(demonstrative with respect to the Ist pers.),
lier, here; Md, hither; the Lat. hoc, this, seems to
h-

as;

be formed in this

manner.

respect to the 3d pers.),
as; det, den, that; der, there; did, thither; da, then;
liv- (relative and interrogative) hvad, hvem, hvilket,

(demonstrative

d-

hvor, where;
i- (placed

with

liv, gives those words an indeterminate
general signification), as: ihvad, whatsoeihr or,
ver; ihvem, whosoever; ihvilket, whichsoever;
before the

or

wheresoever.

AFFIXES.
Formation of nouns,

48.

a) Affixes denoting

the agent-,

Dommer, judge; Læser, reader; Englænder,
Englishman; Viser, a hånd of a watch; Siégvender,
-er:

turnspit.
-ner:

Kunstner, artist; Falskner, forger.

Skomager, shoemaker; Urmager, watchmaknever used separately in Danish, but meer; Mager,
the Germ. macher, in compound words.
from
rely adopted
-Ung: Lærling, disciple; Yndling, favorite; Yngling,
a youth; Gæsling, gosling.
-inde : Hertuginde, dutchess ; Grevinde, countess ;
Sangerinde, songslress ; Veninde, (female) friend ; Ulvinde,
-mager:

is

a

shewolf.

*)

Though

Bi- and An-

are

no

Danish words, yct

they

occur

from the Teutonic tongues,

in several phrases adopted
det garn- an, that will do,
lægge bi, lay by ; slaa bi, stand by ;
self.
Germ, Es geht an ; at gribe sig an, to exert one’s

separately

as :

FORMATION.

63

ske:

Væverske, female weaver; Forförerske,
Giftblanderske, (fem.) poisoner.

tress;

49.

b) the action, as;

Monosyllabic
p.

but there

13,

seduc-

nouns, formed of
are

many

more

verbs,

are

mentioned

of this sort Ex. et

Skrig,
Synk, a draught; et Sting, a stitch; et Stik,
a
Suk, a sigh.
-en; en Prædiken, Præken, a sermon; vor
Gjeren
og Laden, our doiug and omission i. e. our whole conduct.
-ende: Cmit) Vidende,
Çmy) knowledge; Sigende,
saying; Foretagende, undertaking.
-ing: Handling, action; Forandring, change, alteration; Landing, landing; Munding, mouth (of a river);
Tinding, temple (of the head); even of persons, as; ^lrving, heir; Hövding, chieftain, from Hoved;
-ning: Skrivning, writing; Læsning, reading; en
Gjerning, an act (action); en Strækning, a tract of land;
en
Grönning, a green, a lawn; en Slægtning, a relation;
en
Flygtning, a fugitive; en Dronning, a queen, from
Drot, a lord. [In Icelandic Drotning ].
eise: Styrelse, moderation;
Beskrivelse, description;
Udförelse, execution; Frèmbringelse, production; Fornojelse, pleasure; Skrivelse, letter; Stiftelse, establishet Værelse, a room.
ment; Hændelse, accident;
-sel: Födsel, birth; Kjörsel,
driving; Udfôrsel, exportation; Trùsel, threat; Hcéngsel, hinge; Fcéngsel, prison.
-t, d : en Drift, an instinct (from driver ) ;
Dragt,
dress ;• Indtægt, revenue ; Blæst,
blowing, wind ; en Sæd,
a seed,
(from at saa); en Færd, a journey, tour, (fare);
en
Skyld, debt, crime, (skulle') ; Byrd, extraction, descent,
et Vidnesbyrd, a
(bære);
testimony.
si
Kunst, art (from kunne) ; Fangst, a catch, a takc,
Yndest, Gimsl, fa vor; Ankomst, arrivai ; Tjeneste,
service,
but tjenst-ågtig, officious.
-er i :
Fiskeri, fishcry; Praleri, ostentation; Tyveri,
a

cry; et
stab ; et

—

—

:

theft.

formation

64

.

c) Qualifies, &c. dénoté:

50.

heat; Kulde, cold; Vrede, anger;
Glæde, joy; Fylde, fulness; Styrke, strenght; Længe,
row (of houses); Mitte CMidtej, middle.
-de: Dybde, depth; Længde, lenght; Vidde, width;
-c:

Héde,

en

a

Mængde, multitude; Tyngde, gravity.
-hed: Höjhed, highness, greatness; Skævhed, wryness ; Frihed, freedom ; Kærlighed, love ; Rettighed, right,
privilège.
-dom: Viisdom, wisdom; Ungdom, youth; Alderdom,
old age; Lægedom, medicine;
Hertugdomme,
-domme (a province or district) :
doHerredomme,
principality;
Fyrslendomme,
dutchy;
minion.

Grevskab, a count’s estate, also a county ;
fraFjendskab, enmity; Venskab, friendskip; Broderskab,
the
of
and
affinitv
;
ternity, brotherhood ; Svogerskab,
-skab

:

et

—

gend. Klogskab-én, prudence; Morskab-en,
sion; Kundskab, knowledge; Videnskab, science;

com.

diver-

&c. cf.

p. 13 & 14.
-me:

Fedme, falness; Södme, sweetness; Rödme,

blush; Kvalme, qualm.
51.

d)

concrète

things.

dj.); et Onde, an
dark; et Rige,
evil; et
dominion, kingdom, (reign, power), from the adj. rig,
rich, formerly powerful.
-t, (the indef. neut. of the adj.): Rödt, red colour;
Grönt, CGrönsel), vegetables; Blyhvidt, (Bi eghvidt), whitelead; Spansgrönt, verdegris; Berlinerblaat, the Prussian
-e,

(the definite neuter of the
Hele, a whole; et Märke,

(It is

Blue.

germanism

a

to

say

a

the

Spansgrön,

Berliner-

blaa).
-

a

(the indef.

noun

as:

en

of very

Sort,

a

gend. of the adj.) ; en Ret, a court,
ancient formation; especially of persons,
a
en Gal,
negro; en Vild, a savage;
com

65

FORMATION.

madman;
a

en

Lovkyndig

learned man, and

,

lawyer;
frequently

a

more

en

Lærd,

-el, l, (dénotés an implement) ; en Nägel,
Sadel, a saddle : en Skovl, a shovel.
There

ered

as

scholar,

plur.

de

key :

en

de Vilde , &c.

Sorte,

which

a

in the def.

are

a

many remnants of old forms of derivation,
only in sotne few words may be consid-

existing
irregulär,

Maan-ed,

montli ; et

Lev-net,
life, conduct;
Hav-n, a haven; et Sog-n, a parish
(from söge, seek); en Tör-ke drought; en Vœd-ske,
a
liquor; et Lâf-te, a promise.
as :

en

a

en

,

52.

Formation of

adjectives.

-ig-t : modig-t, courageous; sömig-t, sleepy; flittig-t, industrious; lydig-t, obedient.
agtig-t: bondeagtig-t, rustic; kvindeagtig-t, effeminate ;
skarnagtig-t, vile, mean, malicious ; nöjaglig-t, accurate ;
blaaagtig-t, bluish; langagtig-t, longish.
-lig-t : venlig-t, friendly ; daglig-t, daily ; lykkelig-t,
happy; beviislig-t, demonstrable; mulig-t, possible; umulig-t, impossible; syrlig-t, sourish. Sometimes t is insert-

ed

between this termination and the root,

e.

g. mùndt-

lig-t, oral; ôffentlig-t, public; égentlig-t, proper; (from
Blund, inouth ; Germ, offen, Dan aaben, open egen; own).
-

,

Still

frequently

précédés, especially in those
verbs,
denoting a passive possibility.
Ex. kostelig-t, costly; dödelig-t, mortal;
tænkelig-t apt
to be thougt, i. e.
imaginable, conceivable ; nbegribelig-t,
incompréhensible.
more

formed

from

an e

and

,

-som-t: vàldsom-t violent;
nöjsom-t, content; eensom-t, lonely; langsom-t, slow; arbeidsom-t, assiduous.
-sommelig-t : fredsåmmelig-t, peaceable ; möjsommelig-t, laborious; frugtsommelig-t, prégnant; kjedsomme,

lig-t,

tedious.
bar-t:

frùgtbar-t, fertile; ærbar-t, modest, composed; seilbar-t, navigable; ufeilbar-t infallible.
,

5

I

66
-

FORMATION.

barlig-t: skinbdrlig-t, manifest; ufejlbarligt,

that

cannot fail.

-sk:

spodsk, scornful,

disdainful ;

lobsk, restive, starting

(horse) ; træsk, cunning ; lumsk, insidious. Many national or
patronymic adj. get this termination, as: tysk, (tydsk),
German; polsk, Polish ; ùngersk, Hungarian; græsk, Greek,
Grecian; fransk, French. Sometiines i précédés, as: barbdrisk, barbarous; politisk, political; filosofisk, philosophical; tyrkisk, Turkish; russisk, Russian; hebraisk, llebrcw;
kaldaisk, Chaldean.
epitheta gentilia aie used as nouns, and eonsequently
capitals, tliey denote the languages, as : laler De Dansk ?
do you speak Ranis li ? Har de studeret Kinesisk ? liave you studied Chinese? Han kan slet intet Portugisisk, lie knows nothing of
Portuguese. These nouns are usually of the com, gend. as : bred
Dansk, broad Danish; Tysken er vanskelig, the German is difficult.
When such

written with

hornet, horned; biiget, bellied; furet, furrowed;
trekantet, triangulär; firkantet, auttekantet [ottekantet] &c.;
stribet, striped ;smdlstribet, narrowstriped; blaaaaret, blueveined; blaaöjet, blueeyed; hullet, füll of holes; beljærlet,
courageous; haaret, hairy.
-laden-t : mörkladen-t, sortladen-t, of a dark com-et:

plexion, darkfaced ; rundladen-l, round-faced; ered-laden-t,
hot-headed.
-vorren-t, (vorn-t): fjantevorren-t, tossevorren-t,
Isily; kvaklevorren-t, fickle.*)
-s: gængs (gængse), current; laus, silent; eens uniform, alike; fælles, sommon (not fælleds, being derived
from Fælle, not from Fælled).
There are remnants of many

minations,

*)
I do

as :

adjectival tervammel, qvalmish; gylden, golden ; sölvern,

Kviiklevorren: the ordinary
not

misprint

recollect
for

ever

raklevorren,

having

spelling

seen

fîckle: but

this

even

more

•

would be

qvaklevorren.

word; possibly

it is

a

this word is little used.
EI>.

1
FORMATION.
silvern ;

fædrene, paternal ;

67

but these

occur

instances.
53.
-e

Formation of adverbs and

(Icel. -t), indicates

rest in

out; oppe, up ; hjemme, at home ;
out; op, up; hjem, home; bort,
-e

(Icel.

a,

forms

some

lorte,

in

a

few

prépositions.

place,

a

ouly

as:

away;

ude, with(from ud,

away).

oid adv.

from adj.) vide,
widely ; dyre, dearly ; stille, calmly ;
næppe, scarcely (from
knap, scan ty).
-er

east,

(motion to,

or

rest

in

a

vesler

place):

öster

(ud),

(pua), west; aller, again (back); agter,
aft,
abaft; efter, under, ((-c.
-en
(Icel. an, originally motion from a place, now its
signification is not easily defmed): ästen for, to the east
of;
vesten fra, from the
west; uden til, on the outside ; inden (en Time), within
(an hour); oven paa, on the
top
of; næsten, almost; sjælden, rarely.
-igen, Ugen (from adj. in ig, lig): kräftigen,
strongly;
modigen, courageously ; föleligen, sensibly. But the adjectives are frequently used as adverbs, without
the-e«,
as: han blev ikke understottet
kraftigt nok, he was not
supported sufficiently (or strongly) enough; han blev
fölelig straffet, he was severely punished. Several modern
authors would add the neuter t in these
cases, but this
a Swedish
form, contrary to the Danish
usage; w.e
constantly say: de slog dygtig fra sig,
defended
is

themselves
The

bravely; hjærtelig gjerne,

justness

they

with all my heart.
of this rule
evident
from the next
appears

adverbial termination.

-lig, elig (Engl. ly, ehj), as : nemlig, navnlig, to
wifr,
namely ; lydelig, audibly ; snarlig, soon; visselig,
certainly;
fuldelig, fully, (never nemligt, fuldeligt).
-t (The neuter form of
the adj. of olher terminations is often
applied adverbially) as : godt, well ; vidt og
bredt, widely; höjtog dyrt, with terrible oaths; but there
5*

/
FORMATION.

68
are

vel,
—

exceptions, as: knapnok, hardly enough ; heel
well; fuldkommen formjet, perfectly satisfied.

many

very
Those that have

no

t

receive it in the adverbial

the neuter,

added in

form,

as:

never

skjelmsk, roguish,

roguishly.

&

genitive -s): attesteds, eveof all sorts;
rywhere; \et Steds, somewhere; alskens,
other
the
on
over
side, askaunce, nearly opskraas
for,
tværs
across; langs med, along; udvortes,
posite; paa
two last are also
externally; indvortes, internally; the
-s

-es:

the

(originally

,

used

as

adjectives.
Formation of verbs.

54.

-er, is

sometimes merely added

to nouns

or

adjecti-

Agt, intention,
them,
ves,
heat; aabenbar-er,
agter, intend; synd-er, sin; hed-er,
in order to make verbs of

reveal; stiv-er, starch.
is

changed,

(taxes)
pay (as

from
a

cornes to

—

as:

Sometimes the radical vowel

as:

virker, act, work, from Verk; yder, pay

ud,

out ;

fine

glæder, gladden, from glad-, boder,
damage) from Böd, hændes, happens,

or

hånd, from Haand.

complex order are made transimple order, by changing
sitive, and transferred
the characteristic
the vowel, and sometimes hardening
Neuter verbs of the

to the

consonant of the past, thus

springer*
synker,

:
—

sprang,

sank,
sad,

sidder ,

ligger,
farer,

—

laa*

—

for,

—

—

rüg,
!iéd,

ryger,

bider,

sprænger ,

—

—

sænker*
sætter,

set, put;

lægger,
förer,

lay;

röger ,
béder,

smoke ;

the horses båte.

viz. let the hounds or
formed from the present tense,

awaken ;

knager

nikker, nod.

-

knækker,

a thing;
sinksomething

buist

as :

crack ;

carry

;

bait, stop

;

Some few

are

vaager, watch, vækker,

nejer, courtesey, bow ;

69

FORMATION.

-1er:

gifter,

niarry away, from giver ; svigter, fail,
vænter, expect (from Icel. vdn, hope :*)
aim at, from see; sigter, sift, from si;
nægter, deny,

from sviger;

sigter,
from nej,

no.

ligner, am liko ; blegner, turn paie; stivner,
vidner, bear witness.
-ker, -ger: dyrker, worship (hold doar); ynker, pity, from öm, tender ; forsinker, delay, from seen ; vrikker,
jog, from vrider; skulker, sculk, from skjuler; spörger,
ask, from Spor; hærger, ravage, from Hær, Sometimes
i is inserted before ger, as :
beskjæftiger, keep busy, occupy;
fortrediger, provoke; afskjediger [with Molbech afskediger]
discharge; bemægtiget mig, seize upon.
-ser :
standser, stop ; renser cleanse ; hidser, heat
(the biood); hilser, salute.
-sker: hersker, svvay ; husker,
remember; formindsker,
lessen; smasker, smack with the lips.
-rer: bævrer,
tremble; kvidr er, chirp; ytrer, [commonly yttrer,] utter; smulrer, crumble; vallrer, waddle;
kantrer, overturn, or upset (the boat).
-1er: smugler,
smuggie; bejler, court, woo, (from
beder); besudler, soil; funkler, sparkle.
These derivatives in -ter, ner, ker, ger, ser,
sker,
rer, 1er, belong to the Ist conj. Ist dass, and are aliregularly inflected. But though all the examples quoted are
in frequent use, and the derivation in most of them clear
and indisputable,
yet the language' rarely admits of new
formations through these means ; but rather
through the
préfixés : for, be &c.
-érer, forms verbs from roots of the Southern languages, as : regulerer, regulate; reformerer, reform ; dikterer, dictate ; konstituerer, constitute ;
pulveriserer, pulverize; and many more.
They should properly belong
-ner:

grow stifF ;

,

,

*)

But the

erroneous

spelling

renler is most

frequently

used.

70

FORMATION.

to the Ist

ist

conj.

dass,

but

are

often

contracted

and

referred to the 2d dass, e. g. Luther reformerte meget
L. reformed much (raany
things). Han er reformert, be
,

belongs

to the reformed dnirch.

55.
The
chief

COMPOSITION.

composition
of the

source

yet it is by

no

of words

copiousness

means

illimited

is

very

free,

of the modem
or

irregulär,

and the

Danish;
ought
any good

and

not therefore to be
passed by without notice in
grainmar of this tongue.
In general, the last
part of the compound expresses
the chief idea, which is described or defined
by the pre-

ceding part, e. g. en Bog, a book, en Skolebog, a sehoolen
Lærebog, a compendium ; Læsebog, sélections,
extracts; en Ordbog, a dictionary; en Flaske, a bottle,
en
Blækflaske, an ink-bottle, en Ølflaske, a bottle for

book,

beer,

or

Blæk,

in which

means

a

is,

or

bas been

bottle of ink;

en

beer; but en Flaske
01, a bottle of

Flaske

beer, en Punsebolle, is a bowl for punch, but en Bolle
Puns, a bowl of punch; en S'ôlvskje, a silver spoon;
en
Mùrskje,*~) a trowel; Træsko, wo oden shoes. Thus
even
adjectives, e. g. frivillig, voluntary; langvarig, of
long duration; husvant, familiar; làndsforvist, exiled, banished ; likevise some verbs, as : føder, nourish, support,
brödföder, afford, yield sufficient provision of corn for
bread (to a family); hugger, cut; hulshugger behead;
iagttager observe ; islandsætter repair; löslader, set free;
,

,

,

fritager, exempt.
a

Sometimes the last part is a derivative, formed from
w ord, but not used
separately itself. Ex.

separate

r

Husholder, economist, housekeeper; Værtshusholder, innkeeper ; Husholderske, a female housekeeper ; husholdersk,
')

Commonly

written Siilvskee, Mnnrskee.

bd.

71

FORMATION.

economical, thrifty ; from holder, keep ; though Hôlder,
Holderske, holdersk, are no tvords in the Language.
The first part is often

en
en

et
a

Slibesteen, a grindstone ;
Spisesal, a diningroom ;

verb in the

a
en

infinitive, as :
Hvœssesteen, a vvhetstone ;

en
Liggehöne, a brood-hen ;
Kjendebogstav, a characteristic letter; en Byggeplads,
ground to buildupon; en Bærebôr, a handbarrow| Ta-

lekunst, rhetoric ; Talestol, pulpit ; Trykkefrihed,
of the press.
Even substantives

the

liberty

often compounded without any
Kongestad, royal city; Husmand, peasant,
cottager; Raadstne, townhall; likewise: Storherre-n, the
grand-signior; Alverden, the universe; Blaabœr, bilberries; Lediggang, idleness; Hankön, masculine gender;
Fèmfingerurt, cinquefoil; hundredaarig, centennial.
Sometimes the first part is slightly changed e.
g. by
ihrowing away a final e, as : en Firskilling, a penny; Kvindfolk, [commonly Quindfolk] woman; Bettel-staven, the beggar’s staff i. e. beggary, from betle ; or by inserting an e, as :
en
Lfsesax, a pair of snuffers ; en Æggeblomme, the yolk of an
egg; en Gulerod, a carrut; en Sygestue, an infirmary;
et Foredrag, élocution;
forebygge, prevent. In many instances this e is a relick of the Icel.
gen. plur in a;*}

change,

And such

*)

Æggeblomme

thought:

”the

nish,

since the

Danes?” But

the.

was

Lysesax

9

are

as:

,

Iceland word

with the

examples given above:
Ijosasöx eggjablôm. Rask perhaps

case

ïceland.

must

,

here be derived from the Da-

thing probably
no

was imported into the
country by the
matter; the pure Icelandic elements of the word,

vi/., the Gen.

pi. Ijôsa, and the pi, süx, existed in the Icelandic
language long before the Danes saw the lirst (Dut c h or English)
pair of snuffers. In all likelihood snuffers were also lirst introduced into Iceland from

England or Holland. Sygestue, evidently
belongs to that dass of compounds which is mentioned in the preceding paragraph (from Syge disease, or Syge patients) and Forein Foredrag is purely English as in
"foretell”, ”forehead”, ”forespeach” &c. &c. and thus it may be doubted that the insertinon

72

FORMATION.

Landemærke, frontiers ; Sædelære, ethics ; Gjedeblad,
honeysuckle, Icel. landa-mœri, siÔa-lœrdomr, déc. sometie.

g.

old gen. sing, in -a, ar, ur, e. g. Pennekniv,
bedpost, icel. pennaknifr, sœngurSœngestolpe,
penknife;
Still
more
frequently an s is înserted, or the first
stôlpi.
the
is
gen. sing, as : en Handelsmand, a trådesonly
part
a fellow countryman;
man, merchant; en Landsmand,
but en Landmand, is a husbandman; en Baadshage, a
boat-hook; en Vinduesrude, a pane or square of a winIn a fevv instances -n,
dow; et Tidsrum, a period.
is inserted, in words adopted from the German, as : Fruentimmer, woman, Grækenland, (better GrœkelandJ,
Greece, Ærenpris, speedwell, a plant, Germ. FrauenzimThus even Hekkenfelf,
mer, Griechenland, Ehrenpreis.
a euphemism for
Hell, is a Germ. depravation of Icel.
Heklufjall, mount Hekla in Iceland.
A few compound words require both parts to be
farmer’s house,
put in the plural, as : Bondegaard, a farm,
Berneplur Bmdergaarde ; Barnebarn, grandchild, plur.
mes

of

an

—

bern, grandchildren.

Prépositions and adverbs very frequently take the
first place in compounds, as: bortødsle, squander away;
afhugge, cut off; udtale, pronounce, Udtale, pronunciation ;
Udtryk, expression; Indtryk, impression; indelukke shut
burn down.
up, lock up; nedrive, pull down; opbrænde,
Many of tliese compound verbs may also be resolvödsle
ed, and the particle placed separately behind, e. g.
a
makes
oftentimes
this
transposition
bort, hugge df; but
the
compounds being
great difference in the signification;
used figuratively or metaphorically, the resolved verbs
literally or properly. Ex.
,

rykker ind, march into ;
staar af, dismount, a I i ac h t ;
sætter over, cross, (as a ferry);

indrykker, insert,
afstaar, eede,
oversætte, translate,
of

an

e

required
compounds.

is at all

in Danish

to

■mBHH

explain

any

phenomenon

that
kd.

occurs

1
SYNTAX.

overqaar , excel,

73

gaaer oter, pass

(over) ;

udtrykher, express,
igjenlöser redeeni,

trykker ud, squeeze out ;
loser igjen , untie agaim
and adverbs composed with the
prep.
lose this i in
composition with nouns

,

Prépositions
(in) generally
or verbs.
Ex. igjennem
through, gjennemborer, pierce,
gjennemtrænger, penetrate; imod, against, Modstand, resistance, modvirker, counteract; imellem, between, Mellemgulv, diaphragm ; igjen, again, gjentager, repeat; istèdeti,
instead, Stedord, pronoun, Stedfader, stepfather dc.
i

,

PART IV.

SYNTAX.
56.

The Danish

being pretty

manner

of

constructing sentences,

snnilar to the

English, it is needless here to
attempt any complété essay on the syntax. I shall therefore merely offer some remarks on the
peculiarities of
the Danish in this

respect, following the order of the
parts of speech, observed in the preceding pages.
57.
The definite art.

The articles.
of the

adj.

may sometimes be left

out, the definite form of the adj.

showing
forste Gang,
the first time; samme
Aften, the same evening; gamle
Danmark, old Denmark ; especially in naines as : Ny-Holland, Lange-Bro, Rmde-Taarn, and in apostrophes, as:
Store Gud, great God ! kære
Ven, dear friend ; Hojstærede
Herre, Respected Sir, d-c. In a few instances the def.
sufficiently

that it is to be

art. of nouns is
ness ;

for

sterste

addcd,

or

understood,

as:

Delen, for

hele

pronoun

e.

Sagen,

the greatest

g.

the whole busi-

part.

/

74

SYNTAX.

is used with

The def. art.
ral notions,

article

or

things ideal,

expressing geneEnglish has no

all, e. g. Natur-en, nature; Skæbne-n, fate;
death ; Liv-et, life ; Menneske-t, man ; Forsyn-et,

at

Dod-en,
providence; Himlen,
The
out any

nouns

where the

noun

article,

heaven.

whicli governs a genitive is usually withe. g. Verdens Alder, the age of the world;

Aarets

Længde, thelengthof theyear; et Legems Tyngde,
gravity of a body.
The genitives of nouns, as also the possessive and
demonstr. pronouns, like the article, require the definite
form of the adj. following, as : min bedste Ven, my hest
friend; dit gamle Losi,*) your oldlodging; hendes lange
Haar, her long hair; denne evige Snak, this endless
the

twaddle.

57

.

The

nouns.

genereal position of nouns we have spoken
already (p 26), and stated the rule that the nominaIn conséquent
tive usually is placed before the verb.
verb
is
followed
the
by the agent.
however,
propositions,
Ex. hvis De ikke vil tro mig, saa kan jeg ikke gjöre ved
det, if you won’t believe me, I cannot help it. DaFreOf the

sluttet, rejste han udenlands, when the peace
Also in conditional prowas concluded, he went abroad.
det should I absoas
Skulde
:
jeg
endelig
gjöre
positions,
være saa lykkelig, if I might be
do
maatte
lutely
it;
jeg
so happy.
Likewise in questions, as : sér De Skibet, som
seiler der, do you see the vessel, that sailsthere? Taler
De med ham i Morgen ? do you speak with him (see liim)
den

var

,

to-morrow ? Sés vi

night,
night.
*)

or
—

shall I
There

saa

have

are

i

Aften ? shall we then meet topleasure of seeing you to-

the

several adverbs

Commonly spelt Logis.

er.

or

particles

of time

i

SYNTAX.

75

whicli

produce the same effect, when placed at the head
proposition, e. g. derefter rejste han, after this he
departed; aldrig troer jeg det, never shall I believe this.
The genit., when
expressed by termination is always
placed before the word governing it. e. g. for Guds Skyld,
for God’s sake, also : in the name of God. Hans
Metode,
his method. Rigels
Forvaltning, the administration of the
ldngdom. Mange Vandes Lyd, the sound of many waters.
Likewise possessive pronouns, as :
gaa din Vej,
get you gone; hun glemte sin Paraply, she forgot
(left)
of the

•

her umbrella.

But the gen. is also

frequently expressed by means
prépositions, not only af, of, but also til, to. tfec. Ex.
det er Biskoppens Sön, or en Sein
af Biskoppen, it (he)
is a son of the
bishop; en Brodér til Biskoppen, a
brother of the bishop; Dören paa
Huset, the door of the
house.
Ver sehyg ningen i Kædmons
Parafrds, the versification of Cædmon’s paraphrase.
The préposition is
entirely omitted after nouns of
nieasure and the like, as : en
Mængde Mennesker, a crowd
of people ; et
Stykke Træ, a piece of wood ; en Lap Papir, a scrap of paper; en Pægl (Pœ’l) Dl, half a
pint of
beer; en Tonde Sild, a cade of herrings; likewise en
Tonde stærkt Öl, a cask of
strong beer; en Skæppe ny
of

Hvede,

a

bushel of

new

wheat.

But when the

name

of

the

thing measured is definite, the prep. af must be expressed, as : en Skæppe af den ny Hvede, a bushel of
the

new

wheat.

58
In Danish the

noun, to which it

.

The

adjectices.

adjective is always placed before the
belongs, e. g. et gammelt Ord (Ord-

sprog), an old saying; den ny Mode, the new fashion;
fra umindelige Tider, from times immémorial.

Except

I

76

SYNTAX.

applied as surnames, as : George den fjerde, George
fourth; Knud den Store, Canute the great.*)
Many adjectives and participles may, without any in-

when
the

tervenient prep., govern the nouns sometimes as indirect
sometimes as direct objects, (or, in the Latin phraseology

sometimes in the dat., sometimes in the acc.),
er

ikke

Umagen værd,

while);

it is not worth the

del Mennesket

er

gavnligt?

pains

g. det
(or worth

e.

is it useful to man?

skyldig, he owes me nothing. Sometimes
after them, as :
they take the noun together with a prep.
Mennesket?
er det gavnligt for
Han

er

mig

intet

59

.

Pronoms.

genders of the pronoun for the third perof men, are usually apson (han, hun), when speaking
not to the grammatiplied according to the natural sex,
da hun
cal gender e. g. Fruentimret viste meget Mod,
saa mange Fjender, the
(not det) forsvarede sig imod
showed great courage, in defending herself
woman
Mennesket corresponds han,
against so many enemies. To
The tvvo

when

it

means

a

certain man,

but

det, when

it

means

Mennesket mærkede ikke, hvorledes han (not
the man did not perceive how he was

mankind, as:
det) var stædt,

Medskabninger Man and his
fellow créatures.
speaking of animais we use det,
in poelical personificaden, never han, or hun, except
tions and sometimes in vulgär speech.
The pronoun De, when applied to a single person
with the sing, number of the
(p. 38), is always construed
I expect you then ? (not
?
shall
De
saa
verb, as : Kommer
? do you go to the
Komedie
De
Gaar
Komme De).
paa
play?
situated

;

Mennesket og dets

,

In

*)
stian the

Except

also in verse,

great architect.

as :

Christian

Oehlenschlaeger.

Bygmester

stor, Ghribd.

77

SYNTAX.

as :

The numéral pronouns are placed before the nouns,
Huse, tvvo houses ; det förste Menneske, the first

to

When a numéral and an
adjective are added, that
which has the closest connection with the noun mustbe
man.

nearest to

placed

but hele

ti

it,

Bröd,

g. U hele Bröd, ten entire loaves,
whole (not less than) ten loa-

e.

ineans

ves,

When

apply
e.

1829,

g.

aatte

speaking of
Tusind,

the word

alten

the date of the year, we never
but merely count the Hundrede,

Hundrede og

Hundrede og

ét Tusind

ni-og-tyve, not,

ni-og-tyve.
60

.

Verbs.

In common conversation the plural form of the tenses is
scarcely ever made use of, as : vi rejser (instead of rejse)
i Morgen, we départ to inorrow ; det er
tidligt de Konkommer
i
gelige
(for komme) Aften, the royal family comes
early to night; de spiller dét Skuespil godt, they

that

play well.
participles in -ende, are never used as
and
rarely as parts of verbs, but more frequently
gerunds,
as a sort of
adjectives, as : ‘fading grâces“, falmende Yndigheder; ‘falling leaves‘, faldende Löv; ‘calling to one
another, and endeavouring in vain to extricate themselves‘, raabende til hverandre og stræbende forgjæves al
ådrede sig; but: ‘on
entering this first enclosure must
be rendered : i det jeg Iraadte ind i dette förste Aflukke, not
i or paa indtrædende, &c.
‘I was wandering jeg vandrede, not jeg var vandrende (see p. 54). ‘The king
being a hunting da Kongen (just) var paa Jagt. ‘The
soldiers being afraid of the enemy
Soldaterne som vare
‘In
bange for Fjenderne.
promising them some‘, ved at
love dem nogle.
perform

The

active

1

,

1

,

,

4

,

4

,

78

SYNTAX.

The

English participles

be rendered in Danish

often

del

scarcely worth seeing,

61.

they
notes

it

er

gerunds] in -ing must
by the infinitives, as: it is
[or

næppe værd at

se.

Particles.
is worth while to

Of

prépositions

are

used to détermine time ; i with the genitive depast time, as : i Söndags, last sunday ; the nouns

a

observe,

how

in en, lose their n before the genitive s, in this
sort of regimen, as: i Gaar Aftes last night, yestcrday

ending

o thenvise

the usual

genitive is AfMorges,
tens')-,
morning; Formiddags, this forethe
i
noon;
Forgaars,
day before yesterday; i Mandags
With the nomilast
Monday afternoon.
Eftermiddags,
native it dénotés the current time as: i Aar, this y car;
i Dag, to-day; or the time next following, as i Aften,
this evening, which may be said both in the forenoon of
the same day, and in the evening itself; i Morgen, toBut the word Nat not admitting the genitive -s,
tnorrow.
in the case just mentioned, when I say i Nat, it is enevening (from Aften,
i

this

i

—

tirely undecided, whether f mean the night preceding, or
that succeeding this day; accordingly the real meaning
of the phrase in eacli particular case can only be inferred from the context; e. g. Regnede det i Nat, did it rain
last night? faa vi Regn i Nat, shall we have rain this
night ? The following days of the week are indicated by
Forpaa, on, as : paa Söndag, next Sunday ; paa Mandag
few
For
cases we
forenoon.
some
on
Monday
middag,
have other prépositions or adverbial expressions, as: ifjor
Om with the
(i Fjor), last year ; ad Aare, next year.
noun in the definite form corresponds to the English a,
in, as: Tjeneren faar JO Rbd. (Rigsbankdaler) om 3Iaaneden.

The servant

(footman)

has 10 dollars

a

month.

SYjSTAX.

Also

Aa ret, ayear;
morning, &c.

om

in the

om

79

Dagen, aday;

Morgenen,

om

Of the
conjunctions there is scarcely any thingremarkable to be said in the
syntax, there being absolutely
no
mode
in
the
verbs.
It may be observed
subjunctive
that
in
combined sentences several
however,

correspond

the other may be
haade

—

saavel

saa

om

enten

—

vel

men

vel ikke

(great)

*—

da

men

des

—

—

—

—

not

(bedre),

the

—

som,

so

—

—

as;

—

—

—

the

—

;

(better);

as;

or;

or;

)

neither

ikke , i

indeed

alligevel f
men dog,
,

—

deels

;

but also

much the

ej heller, )

men

as
—

only
(more)

either

eller,

précédés

are:

and ;

—

whether

,

eller ,

—

saa

ihvorvel
skönt

og saa,

one

such

as

som ,

—

—

deels

follow,
well

men

—

to

as

eller

hverken

expected

that when the

both

meget des
—

so

som,

ikke alene

jo (meer)

other,

og,

—

(stor)

saa

conjunctions

to each

—

—

—

i

not

—

partly

,

(saa) dot/,
(saa) dog ikke,

—

62.

but not;
but

indeed

vel, )

( kan De),

nor;

—

nevertheless;
but

still;
that;

but for all

partly;
(you may);
although
yet;
still not.
though
as

—

—

—

—

Appendix.

Though the Roman character is daily gaining
oround,
being introduced into the Transactions of the Royal Academy of

Copenhagen and
Norway,

of most other learned Societies
as also used in
many excellent
works of private authors on
Antiquity, History &c. yet
the monkish or Gothic form
of the letters is still
preferred by many, and must be
learned also.
in

Denmark and

80

SYNTAX.

German alphabet,
[Here Professor Rask inserted the ordinary
he in vain
which
and
had
great aversion,
to which he always
I have
to persuade his countrymen entirely to discard.
attempted

of the book since it still is in much
placed it at the begmning
As long as the Germans
general use than the Roman alphabet.

more

is hut
or Gothic form” of the letters there
preserve ”the monkish
as soon as the Gerbut
Danes
it;
the
of
abandoning
small chance
nations
the character novv used by all the civilized
mans

of

adopt

Europe (except

that the Hanes will follow their

Remarks

63.

Greeks)
example, kd.]

the Russians and the

on

there is

no

doubt

the German letters.

capital 3 is also commonly
SöracI and 3q'uS ; though diffeused for the 3
invented
by P. Syv, R. Nyerup &
rent figures have been
them ; in writing
Mr. J. Jetsmark, in order to distinguish
the 3 being
however they are usually distinguished
Of the figures used in print
prolonged beneath the line.
liere made use of,
that of Mr. Jetsmark, which I have
In

this

character the
e

appears

-

g- i*1

preference.
constantly applied

to have the

The

syllables,

long f
even

is

in the combinations

:

beginning of
ff, fl, fp, ft. Ex. flig,
in the

jfal, ftriber, (parer.
another figure, viz.
For S, lias also been proposed
Abrahas been adopted by the celebrated Capt.
ai, which

of Lange’s Dänische Gramm,
hainson in bis first edition
also by the author of these pages, in the
fur Deutsche, as
Grammen that he has afterwards
first edition of his Icelandic
is not only from patriolie motives; this
preferred the å,
found in old Danish MSS. down to 1555,

figure being

introduced into several other lanbut also because it is
and has even been
as Swedish and Laplandic,

guages,
e. g. in Biischings
used in the upper German dialects,
Sammlung deutscher Volkslieder ,
der
und

von

Hagen's

Castelli’s Gedichte in niederBerlin 1807 and in J. F.

SYNTAX.

81

österreichischer Mundart , Wien
1828, 8vo. Also in the
Bornholm dialect by Mr.
Skougaard, in the Farroic by
the revd. Mr.

of

Lyngbye, and in the Acra (on
Guinea) by Capt. Schönning, whereas at is

the coast

used nowhere eise in the world.
The ü and ä are German forms of the
vowels y and
<e, usually preserved in writing German names.,
although
the Germans never use the Danish æ or

ö,

in

writing

Danish names, nor even in
quoting titles or passages of
books.
Some writers also
apply the ü for French
u,

Sïiïance, 33ureaa, pronounce Nyanse, Byraa.
The f is entirely a German
combination, not used
even
by the Germans themselves in the Roman charace.

g.

ter, and pronounced like the Danish

s.

DIALOGUES
AND

EXTRAGTS.

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES
Förste Samtale.

God

Dialogue

Good

Morgen!

1.

sir 1).

morning,

Hvorlédes befinder De Dem )? How do y ou do?
2

Hvorledes staar det til?

Jeg takker, meget vel;

How
ret

are

y ou?

Very ieell, pretty well,

bra’.

I thank

you.

Saa saa; ikke med det bed- So so;

not

very well.

ste.

Meget vel,
Til Deres

Behag
Vær

til

Tjeneste.
Tjeneste.

at sidde

saa

Very well, at y our service.
At your service.

néd.

artig,

og

Piease to sit down.

tag

en

Stol.

i

Öjeblik.

har et lille

Besög
Nabolauget.

Hvad

er

Hvad

mener

Den

er

so
a

Sid néd et

Jeg

Be

Klokken?
De?

kind

Sit down
at

gjöre

as

to

take

a

seat,

chair.

J must

the

a

go

moment.
to

pay

a

visit in

neighbourhood.

What is it o’clock?
What do you think it is?

vel ikke aatte endnu. Scarce eight, I believe, yet.

*) The Danish expression for sir, Herre
rarely used in conversation, except by servants.

or

min

Herre,

is

*) The reciprocal forms, sig, sit, sin, sine, must be avoided,
when the civil pronoun Ve, you, is the nominative ; but if it were
the usual piur. of the 3d person, it should be: hvorledes
befinde de
sig? how do they find themselves?

86

FAMILIAR

den

aatte!

Hvad?

DIALOGUES.

slaaet How ?

er

ti.

it

!

eight

has

struck

ten.

muligt? er den saa
mange! saa maa jeg ogsaa

Er det

Is it

possible ?

is

it

late !

so

then I must go out also,

ud.
Whither

Hvor skal De hen?

Jeg

skal hen at

spise

Frö- I

am

skal hen

at se

til And I

Fru N. N.
det

A!

besöge
Men

godt,

saa

vi

sees

hjemme

nu

igjen?

paa

Tirsdag?

shall

when

But

Shall

again

Dags

sex

eller Why
•

syv.
Aftenen

om

men

me,

silde,

er

kom

jeg hjem-

saa

ikke for

vil vi drikke Te

saa

tve

each

see

home

at

on

?

At what hour?

?

Aa, saadan Klokken

indeed,

!

be

you

Tuesday
Ja hvad Tid

Ja,

on

the ladies !

to visit

other

Er De

call

to

at Ah , that is much better

Damerne !

naar

going

am

Mrs. N. N.

nok

er

going

with

breakfast

to

Mr. N. N.

kost hos Hr. N. N.

Og jeg

you going ?

are

nede i Haven.

about

,

six

or

seven

o'clock.

Yes

,

in

sir !

shall be at
come
ive

too

may

the

evening

I

home, but dont

late

drink

then,
tea

so

that

in

the

garden.
Godt!

som

De befaler.

Well ,

(Adjö !)

Good

Farvel! Farvel!

Good

Farvel!

Anden Samtale.
God Aften Hr. N. N.
Velkommen.

mig meget

Det

you piease.
byel (Adieu).
bye!
as

Dialogue

Good evening Mr. N. N.

fornöjer Welcome,

at se Dem.

2.

to see

sir ! I am very

happy

you.

Hvorledes har De levet, siden How have you been , since I
had the pleasure of seeing
sidst, jeg havde den For-

nöjelse

at se Dem.

you last?

FAMILIÄR

Jeg

dem

er

meget forbunden.
jeg undtager en lille

Naar

I

Excepting

that

confined

for

a

have

Men De

you

fremmed ; hvor-

ledes finder De vort Klima

Det

sig

passer

lidt koldt og
det mindste er

er

i

langt

varmere

do

for Dem?

fugtigt,

Men

jeg

man

you,

Utile

cold,

to

og törrere

room

mg

been very well.

find

least

native

I

hoic

edmate

our

you?

the

air

and

varmer

,

But

foreigner,

a

are

you

at

damp,

is

dryer

mueh
in

my

country.

I dåre say.

indrette sin But

og Levemaade

Klædedragt
efter den Himmelegn, man
lever under, og saa ikke
bryde sig ret meget om
Vejret, især i min Alder.
Det har De Ret

me

to

It is somewhat cold and

Luften

tænke.

maa

a

couple of dags

agree with

i mit Fædreneland.
Det kan

obliged

much

am

sir.

Forkölelse, som har holdt
mig inde et par Dage,
har jeg været meget vel.
er

87

DIALOGLIES,

i; det

var

.

lives

mate one

not care too

weatker

one’s

adapt

and diet to the cli-

clothing

in,

and then

much about the

especially

,

at

my

age.

You

are

right ;
principle ,

very

ogsaa min Grundsætning,
da jeg var paa Rejser.
Men lad os nu gaa néd i

also

Haven, og se om min Kone
har noget Te til os.

garden,

—

must

one

my

was

travelling.

now

let

N.

l

it

was

when I

But

corne

us

go down into the

to

see

) has got

wliether Mrs.
some

tea

for

US.

Det vil ikke

*)

A

være

husband

af

Vejen. Well,

it won’t

be amiss.

calls

his wife by his own surname as
Kone, my wife, or Fruen, Madammen, Moder, accord in g to her rank.
Frue, lady, is used of noblemen’s as also of most civil and military officer’s wives, and Flöhen
of their daughters ; Madamme of merchants' and tradesmen’s wives,

in

as

English,

also

but

of the

daiighters

:

never

ahvays

Moder

says

country

(I/o’r)

:

min

clergymen's
of

a

and elerks’,

farmer’s

or

Jomfru

common

of their

soldicr’s wife.

/

88

FAMILIÄR

DIALOGUES.

Tredie Samtale.

Dialogue

3.

hvad synes De om vort Well, what do you think of
our
Sprog-, kan De forstaa nolanguage? do you under
s tand
af
det?
get
any thing of it ?

Nu,

Det

klinger ganske bra’, at
höre paa, men jeg maa
tilstaa jeg forstaar næsten

lt

understand

slet intet af det.
Men agter De ikke at
Dem efter det?

Jo, jeg

lægge

af

den

Henséende

But don’t you intend to

korte

beære

mig

study

I

med Deres

,

liere, to leam
the language, to know the
people, and to see every
thing remarkable.
I

can

am

stay

glad

very

and I

am

the

find

hear

to

sure

it,

won't

you

language difficult,

and when you have learned

it,

the literature will

repay your trouble
this I

amply

.

entirely rely upon
assistance, and I

your kind

hope

have

you

fiiendship

enough for me, to give me
the benefit of your advice

Raad og Vejledning. Men
först maa jeg béde Dem

viously

at oversætte

translate

Ord,

som

ing

hvert

Öjeblik.

mig folgende
jeg vil behöve

take ad-

to

the short time

of

vantage

stoler In

jeg ganske paa Deres gode
Hjælp, og haaber De har
Venskab nok for mig, til
at

nothing

it?

Tid, jeg kan opholde mig
her, til at lære at kjende
Sproget og Folket, og se
hvad mærkværdigt her er.
Nu, det fornöjer mig at höre,
og jeg er vis paa, De vil
ikke finde Sproget vanskeligt, og naar De har lært
det, vil Literaturen rigelig
belönne Deres Umage.
denne

almost

it at all.

of

har i Sinde at be- Yes, sir! 1 intend

nytte mig

I

sounds pretty well to the
ear, but I must confess, I

and instruction.
I must

for

toords,

require

to

But pre-

beg

you to

the

foliote-

me

which
use

I

every

shall
mo-

ment.

Meget vél,
give mig

Hr. B ! vil
Pen

og

De Very

Blæk,

give

well ,
me

Mr. B.

pen and

will you

ink,

I will

*

FAMILIÄR

skal

jeg

oversætte dem for

Dem i et

Öjeblik. Jeg kan

vel skrive det paa det

Papir.
Ja, jeg önskede just

sam-

me

de

danske

over

helst

for de

fôràn,

kan træffe dem

translate

at

have

at

Öjet

forst,

naar

89
them

for

you in

I suppose 1
mag
the same paper.

moment.

a

write
Yes,

Udtryk lige
engelske, og
saa

DIALOGUES.

on

sir!

I

just

wanted

to

have the Danish words
over

against

and rather in

the

front,

right
English,
in order

that the ege
mag meet with
them in the first place, tchen

I look at the
jeg seer paa Bladet.
paper.
En trékantet Hat, ründ Hat. A cocked
hat, round hat.

Pudder, Pomade, Tåndpulver. Powder, pomatum, foothpotcder.
Kam, Börste, Tandbörste.
Comb, brush, toothbrush.
Nàtsjorte, Manskjètsjorte. ') Nightshirt, frilled shirt.

Nàttrôje, Hàlsklæde,

Séler.

Undenvaistcoat, neckclotk,

bra-

ces. 2)

Vest, Kjole, Frakke.
Beenklæder, Buxer.
Uld-, Traad-Silke-strömper.
Stövler, Sko, Spænder.
Töfler, Nathue, Slaaprok.
Handsker, Lommetorklæde,
Stok.

Waistcoal, coal, great
Pantaloons, breeches.

coat.

Woollen, thread-silk stockings,
Boots, shoes, buckles.

Slippers, nightcap, nightgown.
G lo ves, pocket
handkerchief,
-

stick.

Tobåksdaase, Ring, Ur.
Snuffbox, ring, watch.
Tandstikker, Kikkert, Öje- Toothpick, pocket-glass,
glas.

ege-

g lass.

Tegnebog, Pung, Blyant.
Pocketbook,
Bankosedler, Vexier, Smaå- Bank-notes,
penge.

Visitkaart,

purse,

pencil

.

bilis of

exchange,
change, or small coin.
Sæng, Sængeklæ- Galling cards, bed, bedclothes.

der.

*) Commonly Katslsjorte, Mansketskjorte.
hd.
) The first Edition has gallowses
which certainly is nevcr
heard, either in shops, or in common conversation; still it is found
in snch dictionaries as abound in
slang terms : it surely is rather
2

,

vulgär.

I have

put the usual expression,

nn.

/

90

DIALOGUES.

FAMILIÄR

Sheets, pillows, sofa. x)
Lagener, Puder, Sofa.
Skriverpult, Spillebord, Spl- Writing-desk, card table,

di-

ning-table.

seböl’d.

Looking-glasses, chamber-clock,

Spejle, Stüeür, Lampe.

lamp.

Lysekrone, Gardiner, Over- Lustre, curtains, cups.
kopper.
Underkopper, Ske-er, Kniv-e Saucers, spoons, knives and
forks, table-clothes, napkins.
og Gafler, Diige, Servietter.

Haandklæder, Flasker, Glas. Tovsels bottles, glasses.
Tallèrkener, Lys, Lÿsesax. Plates, candies, snuffers.
,

Candlesticks, snuff.
Lysestager, Snüstobak.
Sealing-wax, seal, wafers.
Lak, Signet, Oblater.
Skrivpapir, Postpapir, Maku- Writing-, post-, wastepaper.
latiir.

Ridehest, Vognheste, Vogn. Saddlehorse, [or riding horse]
coach

horses, carriage.
Coach, coachman, servant,

Karet, Kusk, Tjener.

or

footman.

Vært, Skræder, Skomager. Landlord, tailor, shoemaker.
Barbér, Haarskærer, Bog- Barber, hair dr esser, hookseller.
handler.

Urmager, Hattemager, Hand- Walchmaker, halter, glover.
skemager.
Se, her har De de forlangte Well, sir ! liere y ou have tlie
words required in Danish ;
Ord paa Dansk, men kan
De

nu

ogsaa læse dem?

but nom, shall you be able
to

De har

Tilvisse,

jo

dem med latinske

J

)

Bôgstamig

de andre falde

ver,

The

furniture

first

read them ?

skrevet Surely,

edition has

racter,

see

you have writthe

a

English

other

the

ceuch tvhich is

like that which is called chaise

the continent.

I

ten them in

cha-

indeed I

different piece of

longue,

or

Canapee
n».

on

FAMILIAR

rigtig nok meget vanskelige at finde ud af.
Men de ere dog uundgaaelig
nödvendige at kjende end-

it

find

difficult

very

to

make out.

As yet,

it is indis-

however,

pensably

nu.

Ja,

91

DIALOGUES.

know

to

necessary

them.

jeg först bliver lidt Oh, tchen only I
bekjendtmed Sproget, haa- acquainted icith
ber jeg de gamle
Bogsta- ge, I hope the
naar

vil blive mindre

ver

skelige

for

will be less

van-

Mener

mig.

yet
the

a

Utile

langua-

old

letters

difficult

to me.

Don’t y ou think

so

too?

De ikke ogsaa det?

Upaatvivlelig.

Fjerde

No doubt

Samtale.

of it.

Dialogue

4.

Nu hvorledes gaar det med Well, hoic do you get on icith
Deres Dansk? Har De
y our Danish ? Have you made

gjort betydelig Frémgang

considérable progress.

i den allerede?

Langt fra, jeg forstaar næsten

Far

intet.
Man

siger dog,

der

nothing

De taler ret It is said however, you speak

bra’.

it very

Gid det

I know

from it,

almost.

var

sandt! Men

dé,
sige det, tage méget

fejl.
Jeg forsikrer (Dem), det har
været mig sagt (ell.
jeg

well.

Would it

but those

true!

were

icho say so,

are

mueh mis-

taken.
I

assure

I

can

you, I

was

told

so.

har hört

det).
Jeg kan nogle faa (enkelte)
Ord, som jeg har lært
udenad. Og hvad der er

nôdvèndigt

for at

begynde

say

few words, which

a

I have got
as

mueh

begin

to

heart.

by

as

And

is necessary to

speak.

at tale.

Vel

begyndt er halv fuldendt
siger man ; men Begyndel-

Well
we

begun
say ;

is

half finished,

however,

the be-

92
sen

FAMILIAK

ikke nok

er

De

maa

naa

Enden.

ogsaa

DIALOGUES.

alligevel ; ginning
til

se

at also

is not all,

try

to

make

y ou must

end.

an

Har De

ingen gode dansk- Are there no good Danish and
engelske Samtaler at ànbe- Englisli Dialogues, which y ou
fale mig.
can reconmend
me.
Jo vi har en ganske
brugbar Yes, sir! ice have
pretty
Bearbéjdelse af J. Marstons good edition of J. M. DiaSamtaler, paa Engelsk og logties in Englisli and DaDansk ved afgangne
Kapt. nish, edited by the late
a

Schneider,

men

i

Er dét

Den

som er üdkomKôbenhàvn 1812.

en

stor

üdgjör

Bog?

Is it

omtrent 15 Ark It

i Oktav.

Og

Cap. S., and printed
penhagen 1812.

in Co

-

large volume?

a

makes

about

15 slieets in

octavo.

hvor faaes

den

(faaer
den)?
Hos Boghandler Brummer,

And where is it

to be had?

man

Nr.

(Nummer)

Östergade.
en

52

Der

er

paa

ogsaa

anden kaldet Lommebog

Samtalen

for
Tydsk
som

og

i

Fransk,
Engelsk 1822,

De kan faa paa

samme

At Mr.

Brummers,

seller

the book-

52

No.

Eaststreet.

There is also another , called

Taschenbuch für die

Conversation

Sprachen,

in

&'c.

may g et in the

fremden
which y ou

same

Sted.
Hvilken af dem

er

shop.

den bed- Which is the best
of them?

ste?
Den sidstanförte

er

den

rige-

The

last mentioned is the. ri-

ste, og temmelig nôiàgtig

ehest ,

i

blot paa Ret-

in the Danish

nær;

orthography ;

Dansken,
skrivningen
er

der baade

men saa

fransk og

tysk Oversættelse, som De
vel ikke bryder Dem om.
—

is

a

and

pretty
,

accurate

except

the

but then there

French and

a

German

translation, which I suppose
you don’t care about,
—

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

Men De

maa

Sproget,

tale

bestandig

lut you must

vel eller

enten

ilde.

ved

well

tværtimod

Engelsk

vil vise Dem

som

gôdtgjôre

Öje

related
Dutch

Ihéy ;

dem

have
Plov
—

side ;

Taa

them; deres

hare; give

—

—

—

plough;

—

see

—

commit blun-

to

to
or

the

English,

than

other

living

any

Do you think
so, sir!
Why, I will show you

Ords

arm;

—

ill.

longue.

tv

Arm

speakwhether

fear ; the Danish is not
hard, but rather more nearly

det.

—

language,

'lever

nærmere

nogle Ord,

ege ;

—

nail; Side

—

be

ders.

end Holland-

Méner De dét?

or

alwai/s

afraid

am

sken eller noget åndet Iévende Sprog,

Jeg

the

ing

Jeg er bange for at begaa
Sprogfejl.
Frygt aldrig- for dét; Dånsken er ikke
vanskelig,
men

93

—

to pro ve

some

it.

Finger
finger-, Negl
toe; jeg
I; de
—

—

theirs;
give ; tage
take;
see; först
first :
vi

—

ere

—

—

—

we

are;

saae— sow ;

af

—

at &c.

—

of;

ad

ANEKDOTER.
af A. Fr. liøstes

Miniatiirbiblioték for

Morskabslæsning.

En

>)

havde været paa Komédie.
Man spiirgde
de havde haft?
”Skam faa dén,

hvad

Stykke 2 )

veed

det,

den

”

3

—

Gang 5) jeg gik derhén,
') One,

they

a

person

some times

.

add,

2

og

) pièce, play,

om

sion) to him who ltnows il fif
) the time, tchen. 6 ) tht

4

der

) sagde han, „det regnede osende
Vande, 4)

Plakaten.” 6 )
tøhich

ham,

s

fik

jeg

ikke læst

) A vulgär phrase, to
mig", literally : shaine ( confu4
be il),
) pouring (doten) teaters,

det
I

saa

er

placard■

/
ANECDOTES.

94

En Mànd fortålte i et Selskab, at hans Fader en
3
2
var faldet ) üd igjennem
ti
Gang, O i en Alder ) af Aar,
4
Fra
<(
et Vindue i trédie Etåsje ) néd paa Stenbroen.
7
6
5
Etåsje !” åfbrod ) en ung Herre ) ham, ”naa, )
9
8
Livet.”
slap vist ikke ) derfra ) med

trédie
han

*)

time,

the

certain time.

a

in the

but

falden

of

one

conj.

2d

partie, pass,

e.

g.

we

hvor

3
) Skould properly ha
) age.
often disregard the com. gend.
2

den

er

udgivet?

where

it

is

Etage; the
) story,
printed?
5
) interrupted, from à fbryder (p. 50).
Danish expression is Stokverk.
8
6
) literally : he escaped certainty
) dear me ;
) Gentleman*
9
did
not
) from it
not o : he surely
escape.
the French wag,

also wrilten in

4

7

,

}

1
Stjærneskytten )
.

En

ved et

3

2
österrigsk ) Rekrùt stod om Natten Skildvagt )
4
astronomisk Observatorium, og saae ) tånkelos op

6
til Taarnet )

og den

skyfri

6

Då kom der
Himmel. 7)
10
efter ) Rekruttens Mé-

)

9

oppe paa ) Taarnet,
13
12
en lang Flint,
med
) og sigtede ), derméd
)
ning,
nü gad jeg dog vidst,” 15 ) sagde
14
opad ) i Mörket. ”Men
16
Karl 17) vil
Rekrutten forundret ) til sig selv, hvad dén
1S
med Öjet
han
dérhos ) fùlgde
skyde nü om Natten,” og
20
19
Observatorens Kikkert ) betégsom
)
den
8

nogen )
11

Rétning,
24
23
22
Plüdselig ) skjéde ) der et Stjerneskud, )
25
han
i dét
af Forundring tabte Rekrutten Gevaret, )

nede. 21 )
og

4
3
) looked.
) centry.
) Austrian.
9
8
T
6
)
clear,
)
somebody.
5
)
sky.
cloudless,
)
) the tover.
41
his
to
10
) idea, according
of.
) according to.
on the top
14
13
I2
)aimed.
)up) musket.
idea o; as he fancied, thought.
16
knotv.
1S
to
like
wondering,
)
I
should
wards.
) But now

*) The star-shooter.

1T

the
ed

18

) that fellow,
21

)

at

2

the

same

) pointed out.
telescope.
24
) a shooting star,
Oo fall).

20

)
) the direction.
23
) there happen) suddenly.
25
) his firelock.

time.

22

19

TABES

raabte:
har

)

(l

Naa! 27 )

2T

out,

) crying

Who did

c.

har

nü

trùffet den!”

rigtig
26

(i.

26

29

sét

jeg

dèt méd! 28)

Han.

)

) dear

ever see

95

STORIES.

AND

me.

the tilte o’

28

) well,

I have
29

that)?

)

hit

seen

it,

that

or

too !

hit his

mark.

En Köbmand

ikke

syntes

4
Sàgforer, )

meente

7

)

forsikrede

forlangte

som

om
10

12

)

den.

en

være

Denne besaae

den

) endnü

Love have fastsat
et hos en

Fém-shillings-Mynt, 2) der
3
ægte, ) og spürgde dèrfor en
5
c
gik forbi ) hans Butik, ) hvad han

modtog ')

ham at

) den opmærksomt; 9)
var göd,
puttede den til sig, 11 ) og
13
) 1 Shilling 8 Pence, da de éngelske

14

Sàgforer

8

)

en

Taxt af 6

indhentet Raad.

Shilling
lä

8 Pence for

)

2

received.
) five-shilling-piece. 3 ) literally : which
(to) him to be genuine (or good). 4 ) attorney, or
5
6
solicitor.
) passed by.
) shop, they Write also Boutik, or
7
8
9
even Boutique,
) mcant, thought.
) viewed.
) attentively.
10
1
assured
to
)
(him, that).
*) literally:
himself, i. e. in his pocket.
12
) deinanded. 13 ) still, besides. 14 ) as the E. L. have fixed o:
15
the E, L. having fixed.
) literally: for an, at (of) a solicitor

*) got,

not scemed

received, advice.

SMA AFORTÆLLINGER, i)
Af

Det

samme

Bog,

fårlige Herberge.'2 )

En

simpelt 3 ) klædt Mand, der rejste til Fods, 4) tog en
Aften, paa Vejen fra Condé til Lunze, et Öjeblik 5) ind
i e ) et lille énsomt liggende 7 ) Hus i
Egnen 8) af Peruwetz,
J

) tales, stories. 2 ) lodging. 3 ) simply, poorly. 4 )
5
6
) moment.
(p. 26).
) tog ind i, entercd into, stopt
8
situated,
oncly
) neighbourhood, environs.

on

at.

foot
T

)

*

7
96

AiVD

TARES

STORIES.

Hùsmand 9 ) og hans Kone boede. Medens 10 )
han ildhvilede sig, 11 ) fortalte lian, 12 ) hvorhén han gik, 13 )

hvor kun

en

strågs

14

anfalde

18

16

fattede

)

Værten

)

16

) den Besliitning, 17 )
Vejen.
Næppe var den Rejsende 19 ) gaaet en Fjerdingvej 20 )
videre, för en maskéretMand, truende 21 ) at myrde ham,
åffordrede ham 22 ) hans Penge.
Den Frémmede 23 )
byder 24 ) ham tolv Dukåter med den Forsikring-, 26 ) at
han ikke hår flere hos sig, 26 ) og faar dérved Lov, 27 )
til at drage videre ; 28) men
strags falder det ham ind, 29)
30
at han, ved at fortsætte ) sin Rejse i en saa usikker
Egn, let 31 ) kunde stöde paa 32) andre ikke saa léttroende 33 ) Rovere, og han beslutter 34) derfor, at vende
tilbage 35 ) til det Hüs, han nylig 36 ) har forladt, 37) 0 g
blive dér Natten over.
Han finder kun 3S ) Konen
hjem39
fortæller
hvad
der er mödt ham, og tilme, )
hende,
lige 40) at han har tôlvtüsendeDukåter hos sig. Værtinden 41 ) anviser ham, 42 ) paa hans Forlangende, 43) da
hun ikke har anden Plads, et Leje 44) paa et lidet Loft.
Næppe er han gaaet op, förend Værten, som havde
gjort en Omvej, 45 ) kommer hjem, og giver Konen de
og

at

9

) ham paa

) cottager.
(p. 74).

10

) -white.
) went,

13

he told

ll

i.

) rested himself.
e. was going.

12

I4

) told he

o;

) immediately,

Some authors write strax, but contra ry to the common rule for ar,
being derived from the adj. strag, and written in Germ,

thc adverb

in Dutch straks.

stracks,
1 r

lord.

) resolution.

18

mile, about
demanded of liim (p. 72).
of

Danish

a

25

offers.
2I

) with the

lä
) conceived, formed.
19
) attack.
) traveller.

Engl.

travel

on.

assurance a;

32

) fall

36

)

also,
him.

in

even,

44

21

a

quarter
22
)

him.

28

assuring

him.

26

24

)

) about him.

) Uterally: draw farther, i. e.
30
31
) by continuing.
) easily.

34
35
) credulous.
) résolves.
) turn back.
38
40
at
home
) left.
) only.
)
")
(p. 67).

3S
3r

42
) the landlady (p. 62).
) assigns to him, shows
44
) request (p. 63),
) coucli, bed, 45 ) round-about way.

even,
43

with.

just.

strikes

) it

) the land-

-°)

) threatening.
2S
) stranger, foreigncr, traveller.

one

) gets thereby permission.
29

mile.

16

TALES

AND STORIES.

97

rövede tôlv Dukåter.

nylig

„Dùmrian! 46) (siger hun) du
ikke,
dér
Dukåter;
48
er han.” 47 ) Hvorhos hun
peger ) öp til Tagkammeret, 49 )
hvor han, efter hendes Formening, 50 )
ligger og sover. 51 )
veed

Manden har tôlvtüsende

at

Imidlertid

52

—

) laa den Fremmede paa Luur 53) med

Öret,

og hörte tydelig 54) folgende Anslag 55): Manden
skulde först gaa op paa Loftet,
give ham et Slag i Hovedet, og kaste 56) ham lid af Yinduet. Hun selv skulde
58
staa berédt nédenfôr, 57 ) og med et
ham sin
)
Rést.

59

)

Da

först overalt

61

den

Fremmede horer

Hùg
give
détte, söger 60)

han

Udvej, 62) for at undkomme; 63 ) men
64
Flugt var umülig. ) Han leder mi rundt omkring, for !
det mindste 65 ) at finde et Instrument til
Forsvar, 66) og
lykkeligvis faar han fat paa 67 ) et stört Stykke Træ, der
kan tjène 6 ») til Kölle. 69 )
Bevæbnet dermed vænter han
sin Fjende, og ligesom 70 ) denne træder
ind, 71 ) giver han
ham et Slag i Hovedet, der bedöver 72)
ham, og kaster
derpaa Legemet 73 ) ud igjénnem Loftshigen 74 ).
Könen,
der staar tilréde nédenfôr i Mörke, tvivler intet
Öjeblik, 75)
at det er den Frémmede, der er
nedkastet, styrter 76)
over
Legemet, og hugger, med en skarp Öxe, sin Mands77)
Hoved åf i eet Hùg.
Könen blév hæftet, 78) og fik sin fortjente Lön. 79 ).
46

)

en

49
43
there he is.
) blockhead! 4r )
) the garret.
) points.
51
) in her opinion.
) sleeps (p. 47). 62 ) in the mean time.
53
) laa paa Luur, lay in wait, lurked, listened, 54 ) distinetly. 5S )pro56
) throw (J). 57 ) beneath. 58 ) stroke, blow. 59 )his
jeet, plan.
—

50

60
av li at
\vas
farther required (to kill him).
) seeks (J).
) every vvhere. 6a ) a passage. 63 ) escape (p. 61). 64 ) impossible, impracticable, froni the old verb mue, i. e. maatte (p. 44).
65
) at least, must not be confounded with i mindste Maade, in the
a5
67
8a
least»
) defence.
) he gets hold of. 68 ) serve.
) club.
70
) just as, the moment. 71 ) enters, 72 ) stuns. 73 ) the body.
74
) aperture, 75 ) Ilterally: doubts no moment, i. e. bas not the
76
77
slightest doubt.
) rushes or falls over.
) her husband's
78
) put into jail, 79 ) her deserts.

rest,
61

9

98

TALES

AND

STOKIES

Stôrmbrüden og Pàradisœblet.
Hvô der 1 ) den 17de

den

nÿ Vèjrmëlle
hvis

Distrikt, vil,

kunne 5 ) fortælle

2
3

) ved

)

os

April 1823 har staaet bagved
Lagjewnike i det brömbergske

kommen derfra 4 ) med Livet,
folgende Samtale.

han

er

6

7

8
fattig foråddrelos ) Pige ) og Prestens )
10
séjstenaarige Barnepige, °) ombygge! igen opdraget ) i
hans Hüs, og med et rét nydeligt n ) Ansigt, vilde i Dåg
13
12
som hvér Dåg, siden
) Föraaret ) begyndte, vandre paa
16
14
15
den venlige Fodsti ) forbi ) Möllen til sin Husbondes )
18
Jordlod, 17 ) da Mollersvenden ) Ludvig, den rige Möllers
21
20
19
üd
Hovedet
stak
muntre ) Sön,
) igjennem Möllehullet, )
23
22
Halv
Lise!
skön
)
og raabte spögende; ) Ah, Lise,
25
24
uvillig ) og halv venlig blev hun rödmende staaende )
20
?
)
og spurgde : nù, hvad er der da igjén
27
Ludvig. Som ) jeg sagde dig i Gaar, skön Lise!
hår du ikke Lyst 28 ) til at gifte dig? 29 )
31
Lise. Skön Ludvig! naar lian 30 ) kim vil ærgre )
32
mig, saa lad mig heller gaa min Vej i Ro! )

Lise,

en

—

2
) Ile who.
)
5
escaped, ) vil kunne,
1

9

)

nursery

maid
10

16

behind
mav.

years

the

new

®) orphan.
old.

[The

3

windmill.
7

) giil.

common

educated ; it should be

8

)

) if.
the

4

)

has

parson’s.

spelling is : sexopdragen (p. 45),

) carefully
conjugation ve usually prefer the termination -et
for en in the few participles, that niay still admit the -en in the
12
1
com. gend.
) to-day as every day,
’) right, or very pretty.
1 fi
14
15
13
since.
)her
) by, passing by.
) the spring.
) footpath.
le
17
masler’s.
) the young miller.
) fielcl, piece of ground.
21
19
20
) the hole in the
) sprightly.
) put out, forth his head,
25
24
23
Elisa-'
fair
) blev
)
miil. 22 ) cried jestingly.
angiy.
)
27
2fi
) as,
) what is the matter now again ?
staciende, stood still.
30
29
28
the same as.
) you, han hun are
) a mind.
) riiarry.
often used as terms of civility among the common people, or to
expersons of that dass by those of higher rankt somelimes they
tenaarig.

but

in

ed

the

.]

2d

slight displeasure : du is used mueh more in Danish than
English, but expresses a greater familiarity or superiority
than han, hun, 31 ) annoy. * 2 ) rest, pcace.

press a
thon in

TALES

Disse Ord

sagde

AM)

hun

99

STORIES.

ganske mut, 83 ) i dét hun

vendte

bort. 34)

sig

Ludvig. Men
dig med mig ! Jeg
dig.
Lise.

Som

hùlde

35

)

Lise,

veed

vel,

en

du skal jo ikke

Möller

er

Kommissionær*) vil jeg
39
) Adjö!

for lidt

slet

have méd ham at bestille.

Ludvig.
Mölleliullet

igjennem,
Gang 43 )

Altsaa dog heller )
desværre 42 ) for lidet,
40

er

som
men

36

) gifte
37

) for

ikke 3 »)

Frier? 41 ) O Lise,
kunde jeg komme

styrtede jeg strags i dine Arme. Hör en
husker du vel endnu, 44 ) for
fire, fem Aar
siden? 45 )
Du vilde den Gang endnii ikke 46
) gjælde
for 47 ) en voven Jomfru 48 )
da gav du mig vel
endog 49 )
50
et Kys, naar jeg om
Söndagen ) tog dig paa Sködet, 51 )
en
og gav dig
Pébcrkage. 52) Nü har visselig Herr
Pastoren 53 ) forbudet 54 ) dig det ; ikke
sandt, 55 ) han præker daglig for dig?
Lise. Ikke sandt, han havde nu Ret, 56 ) til at
præke :
"Lise ! begiv dig til dit Arbeide, 57)
lad
ikke
Mölleren
og
have dig til bédste?” 69)
Lise var nü virkelig i Begreb med at gaa, 59 ) hvor
gjérne hun end 60) gad 61 ) höre den overmodige, 62 ) men
saa

—

—

—

83

)

is

in

34

pout.

a

particle

a

vvhole context is:
37

you shall.

) lidt, contracted of lidet (p. 28), is only used as
3S
) not at all. 39 ) have to do with.
*) agent.
41
4
) suitor.
consequently rather.
-) indeed, or I am

adverb
40

) turning herself away. 35 ) charming. 36 ) jo,
difficult to translate, the
purport of the
who says that you shall, or:
nobody says that

very

)

or

to

noun.

43

) hark

44

) do you still recollect.
) then still you would not. 47 ) pass for. 48 )fullgrown
49
young lady (see the note p. 87).
) you would even give me.
30
51
) p. 79.
) on my lap, knees. 52 ) gingerbread-cake. S3 ) the
sorry

4ä

)

say.

ago.

64

parson.
55

)

) prohibited ;

is not it true

position.
58

) malte

away,
iuous,

a

moment.

40

60

that,

or

as

to

the

56

)

a

fool of you, talte you

a

right,

order of

dig det see p. 26placed after the next pro57
) go to your (thy) work.
50
in.
) was really about going
6]
) would, liked. 62 )presump-

does not he,

occasion to,

) hvor,,.end, however,

1*

100
63

ellers

AND

TALES

)

brave

STORIES.

64
Ynglings ) Spög, 65 )

da dénne endnu

67
Og sé! )
Gang ) raabte: Lise, skön Lise!
69
69
vendte sig rigtig nok ) endnvi en Gang om ) og
66

—

Hold Forklædet

lille Hex!

op,

70

en

Lise

16.

) raabte Mölleren,

72

Forklædet

splinternyt ) Æble fra Paradis. Förend
fattet en Beslutning, om 73) hun skulde holde
frém 74 ) eller ikke, rullede Appelsinen 75 ) hen 76 )

for hendes

Födder,

dér hår du
hun havde

seet for.

71

) et

Frugt,

en

som

min Eva! raabte

79

Spis, )

aldrig 77 ) havde
Kårlen léende, spis

hun

det skönne Påradisæble!
Den lettroende

ganske

skæv

79

)

Pige fùlgde Raadet, og trak Munden
Smag 90) af Skallen; 81 ) men

ved den bitre

bemærkende, at en söd Saft ) flod lid ) af Hullet,
löb hun hùrtig 84 ) bôrt med Appelsinen, imédens Lùdvig
85
spottende ) raabte efter hende : Lise, skön Lise ; hvordan
82

vel

83

smager Påradisæblet?
86
Pigen stödnu paa Préstens Mark, ) ogbnigteSpå89
89
87
den paa det flittigste ) forat indhente ) det forsömte. )
90
9
For hendes Tanker svævede ) üden Ophor ») den mùn-

Ludvig. Saaledes gjör han med alle Piger, sagde
til sig selv, alle gjör han Löjer 93 ) med, og tænker
o! og dög 94 ) er han en god, brav Dreng, 95 )

tre 92 )

hun
ikke

96

flittig, ordentlig, og hvor smukt klæder ) ikke hans ny
Er det da ikke ôgsaa skikkeblaa Klæder 97) ham!
at han, om ogsaa ") af Overgivenhed, 10 °)
af
")
ham,
ligt
—

64
) p.
) otherwise.
°9
) om,
e«) vei'ily.

S3

,

have
see

a:

p.

62.

74

) forth,

79

)jest.
70

about.

tbere is for you.

79.

63

up.

72
75

66

) still another

time.

) witch. encbantress.

) a spick-span-new.
76
) up
) the orange.

7J

71

)

6T

) look!
)thereyou

om

to.

—eller,

T7

)never.

80

) taste.
)
(I).
83
82
) ran out, came out (p. 44.)
) sweet juice.
) shell, peel.
67
86
85
64
) very diligently.
) field.
) with raillery.
) speedily.
90
*9
88
)
make
)
hovered,
presented
retrieve,
neglected.
good.
)
9Z
93
91
liimself.
) playful.
) fun. 91 ) however.
) incessautly.
97
9
)clothes.
**) boy (I). °.) klæder ham smukt, becomes hint well.
10
98
done.
or
kind
")
°) frolick.
although perhaps.
)
kindly
78

eat

81

wantonness.

) literally: drew the mouth cutirely awry.

TALBS AND

101

STORIES.

den skönne

Friigt ? han méner det dog vel ')
méget
mig.
Medens hun tænkte dette, nærmede en huul Lårmen 2 ) sig meer
En sélsom, 3 )
og meer fra Landsbyen.
4
5
kraftig ) Lùftstrômning, ) kun indtagende ®) en Brédde
af omtrent 7 ) 200 Skridt, 9 ) styrtede sig i dette Öjeblik
hid fra Krùschvvitz, og förte först Tåge 9 ) og Ruder, siden 10 ) Skure og Stalde 11 ) bort méd sig.
Luften, der
stedse blév morkere, robede 12 ) den eensomme Pige en
sig nærmende Orkan; hun ilede 13) hén bag et levende
Gærde, 14 ) der rigtignok 15 ) endnu var ùden Lov ; > 6 ) men
dog tæt 17 ) nok til nogenlunde 1S) at bryde Vindens Magt.
Nü flöj allerede Straaet fra hendes Hjems Tåge tættere
19
21
og tættere hén ) over hende ; en stor Lade 20 ) flagrede )
22
lig en Fjéder hojt oppe i Luften, derpaa ) igjen skinnende Linned, der var fort bort fra Blégen. 23 )
Men mi
gåv mig
ikke

slemt méd

saa

frygtelig brager og bruser 24 ) og hviner det. Lise
bævende 25 ) ivéjret: ved Gud, det er den ny Véjrmölle, der uimodstaåelig grében 26) af Lùftsstrômningen,
lig en Papirsdrage, 27) siiser hén 2S) over hendes Hoved.
Ved dette skrækkelige Syn tåber 29 ) hun Bevidstheden. 30)
Dog snårt vækker en forfærdelig Knagen 31 ) hende. Stor—

seer

l

) vel,

is

particle difficult

a

where there

sibly.

2

)

miglit

still be

translate,

lo

some

hollow noise.

il expresses a probability,
doubt ; lilie : I should think, pos-

3

5
) stränge. 4 ) powerful.
) current
8
9
)
only
) about. ) paces
) roofs
p. 19).
1
°) aftervvards. 31 ) sheds & stables. 12 ) betrayed, rüber is betray,
indicate, but forraader is betray perfidiously, like a traitor. 13 )hast14
ened.
) a quiekset hedge. lä ) indeed. 16 ) leaves (? p. 21).
17
le
20
19
) light, thick.
) in some degree.
) axvay.
) barn.
21
23
24
) fluttered. 22 ) after that.
) bleaching-ground.
) roars.
®6
) trembling. 26 ) irresistibly seized. 2T ) a kite. 28 ) xvhistles

of air.

away.

a

s

28

that

)

loses,

r

filled.

tabe is to

may be l'ound again, but
most difficult to recover.

lose for

miste is to
30

a

time,

lose

) consciousness.

or

something that

entirely,
31

or

something

) crasking noise.

102
men

TALES

havde ladet sit

fra hende laa Möllen

AIS»

STORIES,

Bytte 32) fare, 33 )

nedstyrtet. )

Efter dette tordnende Fald

igjen ldévet stille 37 ) ;

34
og kun faa ) Skridt

35

men

var

det paa

med

38

een

Gang33 )

unævnelig
Ludvig maatte være begravet méd 41 )
under Möllens Ruiner.
Véklagende 42) irrede 43 ) hun omden
lette
kring
Bygning, og den sandeste Smertes44 ) Taarer strömmede néd ad hendes
Ansigt. O, var Huset dog
kun 45 ) styrtet néd paa mig, raabtehun
jamrende; 46) ti 47 )
48
hvorledes skal jeg overleve ) hans Död?
Aldrig har
han anet, 49 )
50
mit
tilhörte
livorméget
Hjærte
) ham, hvor
kært ethvért Blik, 51 ) ethvert Ord af ham vår
mig : aldrig,
det vidste jeg vél, kunde jeg blive håns, men
dög havde
jeg ham.kær, 5 ®) og var lykkelig ved kun at sé 53 ) ham.
Nu er han borte, den
venlige Yngling; knust 54) ligger
han under sonderbrudte 56 )
Bjælker! 56 )
57
Imédens den skyldfri ) Jomfrus héle
Hjærte üdgöd
sig 58) i saadanne Klager, löd 59 ) pludselig Ludvigs vélbe-

begréb 40)

32

) booty.

word
latter

from
case

Lise

at

33

) go, (fall.)
tlie verb at faa,

faae,

to

) Forfærdelse 39 )

make it

34

)

lo

few. In order lo

get,

some

distinguish

this

authors write in the

analogous with the other verbs in -e,
opposition to etymology, the pronoun being
a
dissyllable in the old tongues, Anglosaxon feawa, Icel. fair, Lat.
pauci, the verb on the coutrary a monosyllable, Anglos. fon, Icel.
fd, Swed. fd. 35 ) hurled down, thrown down. 36 ) all at once,
3T
) calm. 38 ) unspeakable. 39 ) horror. 40 ) undersuddenly.
41
stood, thought.
) with (the other things). 42 ) lamenting.
43
44
) strayed.
) pain, grief. 45 ) werc but only! 46 ) lamenting.
47
) for, also written thi, but improperly, it seems, the old Ih being
in all cases changed to t or d in the modern Danisli, even in this
same word in the
composition fordi, because, not fordhi. 48 ) sur49
vive, live after.
) imagined, also written ahnet, according to
51
the Germ. orthography. 50 ) belonged to, was devoted to.
) look.
52
) I had him dear, i. e. he was dcar to me. 53 ) by merely
seeing (p. 77). 54 ) crushed. 3S) broken to pieces. 36 ) beams.
5T
) guiltless, harmless. 58 ) poured forth itself, streamed fortil (the
59
heart i. e. feeling).
) sounded, was heard.
but this

is

in direct

Stèmme

kjendte

: 60

103

AND STORIES.

TALES

) Lise, hulde Lise !”

Skjælven61 )

Fn

—

löb over hende; modlos 62 ) saae hun sig om, ogsee! Ludvigs Hoved stak muntert lid af Möllehullet, der nü vendte
63
Ogsaa i hans Öjne stéde Taarer.
op ad mod ) Himlen.
”Bedste Lise,” sagde han forvirret, 64 ) hjærtelig élsker

”jeg dig:
”me; 65 ) ti

—

ligger

”skal vi saaledes erfare
”ånden?

Bryd

”alleréde 69 )

Nu,

—

"Arme!” Hér
elende 75 )

lad

en

sige

os

Arm i

)

70

trykte

—

det,

) hér

)

77

og hente

Arm, betragtende

) Pige
dig,

til

köm,

—

79

71

—

lide og i dine
glödende, af évervæt-

76

bragt mig

) for hin-

Vinden har

Giid,
)
du migdåsaa

men,

sitrende

67

löst,

Smule.

en

han 74) den

Jomfrubnid

ham

68

73

Glædesfôlelse

blèven

at vi ère bestémte

Lise, hår
skje Tak, ) jeg er

}

Herren

”Guds Storm selv har
er

66

kim dette Brædt

72

Jorden;— gode Barn,

néd mod

lösnet Sömmene

"hvilken Helvedfart!
”kær?

kim üd af den fordömte Klem-

hjælp mig

Dören

til
—

sit

Bryst*

Störmbrüden

kom til min

Fader,

) hans Tilladelse !

78

)

sålige 80)

) hinanden med

Blikke, vandrede de Elskende til Landsbyen. 81 ) Paa dèn
Plads, hvor den nÿ Mölle havde staaet, fandt de Ludvigs
Husfæller 82 ) samlede med lydelige 83 ) Véklager. Som en

63
oa
)towards.
) well known voice. 61 ) shivering.
) downcast.
68
66
67
65
destined.
learn.
strait.
)
) perplexed.
) board,
)
)
69
also written Bref.
) already, in Danish it must be written with
W, being composed of alle-rede, Icel. alla-re&u , whereas neither
But alene, should be
ale nor erede afford any meaning whatever.
60

G4

One l, being compounded of al-ene, wholly-one, i. e.
70
71
) a erura, bit. a little. 7a )
al~one, Icel, aleinn.
) the nails.

written with

heil-flight.

73

sed: presser is

) literally:
also

a

74
) he prespraise (that).
verb, but used of squeezing violent
76
75
) trembling,
) overwhelming.

to the

Danish

lord be

compression, compulsion &c.
sometimes, though erroneously, written sitlrer,
zittrer, but the Icel. titra, has but
get.

lage.

78

79

) permission.
) gazing
82
) house-fellows, inmates.

one

l in

upon.

or

in the Germ. way

the middle.

80

) blissful.

■*) loud.

Tr
8I

) fetch,

) the

vil-

*

104

TALES

AND

STORIES.

Aand viste han

sig midt iblandt dem. Den gamle Faders
Henrykkelse
gjénsee ham, overgik 85 ) ål Beskrida
Sonnen
forestillede 86 ) ham den undséelige81 )
velse, og
som
sin
Lise,
Brud, saa blev den forste hèftige Glæde 88)
84

en

og

) ved at

blid

Forenings Stifter. 89) Snart var den forældreløse 90)
fattige Pige ômskabt 91 ) til en Madam Möllermesterinde,

92
og hun plejede ) siden ofte, i Foleisen af sin
sige : ”Eva mistede Paradiset, da hun spiste

Lykke, at
Frugten, for

mig har
Dén

Påradisæblet

betydet 99)

Paradis selv.”

iövrigt, 94 ) ikke vil tro 95) denne sandfærdige ) Historie, der rigtig nok, formedelst Yejrmollen,
der susede igjennem Luften med Mölleren, smager stærkt 97)
99
af et Æ ven tyr, han éfterlæse 98 ) den paa
graat ) Makul0
latiir) °) trykte ») Haude- og Spenerske Tidende 2 ) Nr.
57 for 13de Maj 1823, under blandede
Bekjèndtgjôrelser, 3 )
hvor han vil overtyde sig 4 ) om, at Historien om denne
som

96

Vindmölle 5 ) ikke

er

Vind.

84

) rapture. 85 ) passed. 86 ) introduced, presented. 87 ) bash88
) excessive joy. 89 ) founder. 90 ) orphan. 9I ) transfor9I
med.
) used. 93 ) signified. 94 ) as for the rest. 95 ) believe.
96
) true. 9T ) much. 98 ) consult. 99 ) grey. 10 °) waste(p. 41).
J
s
) printed. 2 ) Gazette.
paper.
) miscellanous advertisements.
4
) convince himself. *) a Germanism for Vejrmöüe, preserved
ful.

here. to

make

a

quibble with the following word

Vind

*

TABES

105

AND STORIES.

Fédor og Evelina.
1

Fortælling, ) (af

en

F. C.

Hillcrups Italica,

Förste

1. B. S.

85).

Capitel.

Mig ôpgaar mi min Morgenrode, 1 )
jeg Solen skuer 3 ) i sin Glands; 4 )
hvor tusind svage Hjærter blöde,
jeg vundet har min Séjerskrands. *)
Jeg glemmer 6 ) eder, svundne T ) Dage
ej nage *) meer mit Bryst,
kan ej komme meer
tilbage;

!

I skal
I

Natlirens Skönhed

Omtrent

9

)

er

min Tröst.

tré danske Mile fra Rôm hæver

sig l0 ) Albanerere ligesaa mærkværbjergenes
Gruppe.
dige n ) for Beskueren 12) med Hénsyn til den henrivende 13 )
Natürskönhed 14), der pryder 15 dem, som til de ærværdige 16 ) Minder 17) fra den klassiske Oldtid, 18) der overalt
frembyde sig for Vandrerens Blik. Hvo har vel 19) nogensinde 20 ) tilbragt 21 ) skönne Öjeblikke 22) i de
venlige
Smaàstæder 23) Fraskati, Marino, Kastel Gandôlfo,
Albåno,
Némi, og mindes ikke 24 ) med vémodblandet 25 ) Glæde sit
behagelige 26 ) Ophold 27 ) i Sködet 28) af en fortryllende 29)
isolérede

Natür?

2

) tale,

Hvo

De

vandrede

2

novel.

vel 30) ved

) aurora, dawn.

Albånersoens 31 )

3

og

) behold (}).
) splen) trophy, wreath of victory. ®) folget ()). r ) gone, past
(p. 48). •) not gnavv, tonnent, trouble. °) beauty. 10 ) rises to
2l
12
13
the view.
) remarkable.
) spectator.
) ravishing. 14 )
dor.

beauty
17

4

s

of nature, beautiful nature.

) remembrances,

particle

see

p.

10]

monuments.

note 1 ;

lä

18

here it

) adorns (}).

) antiqnity.

10

16

) venerable.

)

vel of this

the Engl
) spent. 22 ) moments. 23 ) small
2ä
toxvns. 24 )
does not call to mind.
) mixed with sa dness. 26 )
27
2e
agreeable.
) sojourn, stay.
) bosom. 29 ) charming. 30 )
31
shall have wandered, cf. note 19,
) of the lake of Albano.
who shall have.’

20

)

ever.

21

seems

to

answer to

/
106

TALES

AN»

STOKIES.

Némisôens romantiske

Brædder, 33)

med et

at

33

Længselssuk, )

og önsker ikke ofte

gjénsee disse uforglemmelige31 )

Egne?
I

længst 35 ) hénsvundne Tider, förend Historien endnu
lader sin Rost 36) höre om Menneskenes Færd 37 i disse
)
Bjerge, liar en frygtelig 58) Vulkan raset 89) hér, og efterladt gigantiske Spor 40 ) af sin Tilværelse 41 ) ved 43 tre
)
störe, i den fjærneste Oldtid udbrændte, 43 ) Kratere, som
nu ère forvandlede til en
yppig 44) blomstrende Dål, og
tô maleriske, 45 ) Indsoer, 46 som de
)
medhôjetilbâgetræ49
dende 47) Skraaninger, 48 ) der
omgive ) dem, danne 50) tre

trågtformige 51 ) Fordybninger. 52 ).
fordums

53

) Kratere

Det störste af disse

A Ib à nersö en, der förer Navn efter

er

Staden

Albåno, og har en æggeformig Skikkelse. 64)
Dybt néde, umiddelbart ved 55 ) dens Brædder, slynger sig 56 )
en Fodsti
gjennem blomstrende Frugthaver og smaa Viinplantninger, 57 ) der omgive det klare Vandspejl 58) lig en
yndig Krands, 59 ) fra hvilken Jordsmonnet 60) hæver sig
flére 61 ) Hundrede Föd 62) i en
temmelig stejl 63) Skraa64
som
træder
meer
ning,
bestandig )
tilbage, jo meer den
fra
fjærner sig
Dybet, og endelig afbrydes af den ovre65 )
som
med
den yppigste Vegetation danner Randen 6S)
Bræd,
32

) shore, some authors write Bredder, but Brædder seems to be
préférable : 1) on account of the pronunciation : 2) iu order to
distinguish it from Bredde breadth, latitude, which is pronounced
with, e; 3) to show its derivation from led. barfr, and its analogy
,

Swed. brådd.

to
3b

) long ago.

40

)

traces.

41

33
36

)

)

sigh

) her voice.

existence.

its existence three

of

great &c.

42

longing.
) doing.

3T

) by
43

or

34

) not to be forgotten.
) terrible. 39 ) raged.

38

in, i.

e.
44

left

as

) rich.

traces of
45

) pie)
turesque.
) lakes.
) retreating. 48 ) declivities. 49 ) surround,
50
) form (f). 51 ) funnel-like. 52 ) cavities. 53 ) old,
encompass.
64
5S
) form, appearance.
) close to. 36 ) winds itself i. e.
5T
runs a winding (foot-path).
) vine-plantations. 58 ) expansé of
water.
") graceful wreath. 60 ) the ground. 6I ) more (than
62
15 3
64
one) i. e. several.
) feet (p. 24).
) steep,
) alvvays,
65
66
) upper.
) the brim.
continually.
46

4T

burnt out.

TALES

af den

eller

Tragt

Overflade

69

)

AND

67
Bæger, )

det

hvis Bund
70

En for det méste

er.

107

STORIES.

) smal

71

68

) Söens

) Yej löber

denne

höje Kyst 72) og frembyder paa en
skön Dag bojst maleriske Udsigter 73 ) över den melankölske dybe Sö og dens idylliske Omgivelser, 74 )
hvor disse Bjerges höjeste Spidse, 75 ) Monte cavo kaldet,
næsten allevegne 76 ) afgiver 77 ) en
behagelig Hvilepunkt78)
for Ojet.
Fra Staden Albåno selv kan man ikkeöjne 79 )
Soen, men maa, for at see den, gaa et Par Hundrede
Skridt lidaf Byen, og bestandig opad. Da standser 80 )
man tilsidst 81 )
paa en böj Brink, hvorfra man skuer den
dunkle 82) mystiske Vandflade 83 ) dybt under sine Födder.
Til venstre förer 84 ) en Allee af gamle
ærværdige Ege 85 )
andre
Træer til den lille By Kastel Gandolfo, som
og
med sin Kuppel og sit
pavelige 86) Sommerslot 87 ) hæver
88
sig paa de ujævne ) Höjder. I Båggrunden taarne sig89 )
de fjærne Appenniner, blandt hvilke det
taggede 90) Sorakte
nü tildags 91 ) San Oreste, troner 92 ) i stille 93 ) Majestæt.
Til höjre 94 ) seer man Klosteret Pallazuola, som bebdes 95 )
af smudsige 9C ) Munke, der prale 97) af at en
portugisisk

langs

om

Prinds engang har lévet og doet som en råget 98) Broder 99 ) i deres Midte. 10°) Denne fromme Fyrste 4 ) hedder
endnu

bestandig

67

) cup.

72

)

68

69

bottom.

)

73

coast.

i dette Kloster il

7T

every wliere.

74

views.

)

) affords.

)

) surface.
environs.
78

) point

Portoghesino,
T0

75

) mostly.

og hans

71

)

narrow.
76

) point, top, peak.
7t

of rest.

) see,

reacn

)

with

80
the eye.
) stops. 81 ) at last. 82 j dark. 83 ) sheet of water.
84
) on the left hånd leads. 8ä ) oaks. 86 ) papal. 8T ) summer-

seat.

det
92

)

sits

on

hånd.

) shaved.

the

the throne, stands.
95

90

89

) tower.
unequal.
) jaggy. [Rask spells
common
spelling is takkede ed.] 91 ) now-a-days.

uneven,

taggede-,

)

right
98

8e

)

is

inhabited

93

) calm, unshaken.

(p. 41).

96

) filthy.

91

)

9T

on

the

) boast

99

) brother, friar. 10 °) In their middle, among them.
r) pious prince, Fyrste is generally said of a reigning prince,
Prins of a young person of biood royal. It should be written
without a d, as also : Provins, Krans, Dans, Glans, there being no
d in these roots, but the

hz) is still

more common.

orthography

with nds

(from

the German

108

TALES

AND

STORIES.

Billede,

som hænger paa en
Væg i disse mörkc Haller,
Gjénstand 2) for Munkenes Beundring. 3) Mere mærkværdigt for den fordomsfri 4 ) Rejsende er en romersk 5)
Konsuls Gravmæle, 6 som findes i Klosterhaven 7). Noget
fra 8) dette Mysticismens og Sværmeriets 9 ) eensomme
Sæde hæver sig paa Bjergets Skraaning den ùsle 10) men
höjst romantiske Landsby, Rocca di Papa, der, paa den
vildeste og sélsomste 11 ) Maade, ligesom 12 ) hænger néd
ad Klipperne, 13 ) og i det fjærne 14 ) ikke er ulig en Svålerede. 15 ) Naar Vandreren er kommen igjennem 1G ) denne
lille By, træder han lid 17 ) paa en anséelig Slette, 18) der
förer Navn af Campo di Anibale, enten fordi Hannibal
dér har haft sin Lejr mod Romerne, eller, som andre
vel 20) med mere Grund 21 ) antage, 22 ) fordi Romerhæren22 )
dér havde sin Lejr, for at iagttage den kartaginénsiske
Feltherre. 24 )
Naar man mi har vandret et Stykke frem
paa denne Slette, staar man ved Foden af den Bjergtop, 25 )
som förer Navn af Monte cavo, og.hæver sig omtrént
trétüsinde Föd över Middelhavets 26 ) Overflade.
Denne
27
som
har
af
en
afkortet ) Kegle, 28)
Skikkelse
Spidse,
29
30
bestiger ) man med Blagelighed ) og Sikkerhed ved
Hjælp af en antik brolagt 31 ) Vej, der i Oldtiden forte op
til et Jupiters-Tempel, som dannede Bjergets höjeste
Til delte ærværdige Sted, som nu har maattet 23 )
Punkt.
33
for
et Mùnkekloster, droge 34 ) i de hédenfarne 35 )
)
vige
er

2

3

4
) admiration.
) unprejudiced. 5 ) Roman, proT
6
ilounce rommersk.
) tomb.
) convcnt garden. 8 ) A short
10
21
from.
fanaticism.
miserable.
°)
way
)
) moststrange. 12 ) as
13
14
it were.
) at a distance. ls ) swallow’s
) from the rocks.
16
1T
ncst.
) is come through, has passed through.
) cornes out.
le
19
2
) considérable plain.
) camp.
°) may liere be rendered per-

)

object.

21

haps.
ral.
28

)

25

)

)

cone.

obliged

to.

27, it p, 44

22

) believe. 23 ) the Roman army. 24 ) Gene27
) of the Mediterranean.
) shortened.
a9
30
al
) ascends.
) ease.
) paved. 32 ) has been
33
) give vvay. 34) drew i. e. tvent, ef. p. 96 note
35
) deceased, gone past.

reason.

summit.

26

109

STOKIES.

AN»

TALES

sejrende 36 Feltherrer, for at bringe
Gudernes Fader Tak og Pris, for den forimdte 37 ) Lykke
Naar nu omsider 39 ) den Reji tilendebragte Krige. 38 )
sende staar paa denne ophôjede 40 ) Pùnkt, da lönnes 41 )
den Möje, som Opgangen 42 ) kan have foraarsåget ham,
fuldkommen ved en vid og fortryllende Udsigt over de
historiske Egne, som en Gang i hénsvundne Dage spillede 43 ) cn'saa forbavsende 44 ) Rolle 45 ) paa Jordkloden. 46 )
Möd Vesten svæver Blikket üd 47 ) over den uhyre Slette,
i hvis Midte Verdens 48 ) gamle Hovedstad 49 ) trôner med
sin Péterskuppel, og üd over denne Slette tåber Öjet sig
i Middelhavets umaalelige 50 ) Sölvflade, som i den yderklassiske

Dage

de

Horisont synes at smelte
Mod Nord og Öst begrændses 53 )
ste

51

)

ninernes

54
höje Bjergmasser, )

hæver 56 ) sit triiende

sammen 52)

med Luften.

Synskredsen

blandt

hvilke

55

af

Apen-

Soråkte

)

Höved; mod Syden opdager 57 )

man

Öer og Forbjerge 58) i Kongeriget 59) Neapel.
Vil man
nu betragte 60 ) de nærmere Gjénstande, da overskuer 61 )

Albånerbjergenes héle Masse med alle déres yndige
Skove 62) og mange Smaastæder, og dybt néden under
64
sig 63 ) seer man de omtalte ) Indsoer, der danne en
65
66
Figur ej ùlig et Par Briller, ) som dog rigtig nok blive )
lidt urégelrette, da Albånersoen er meget större end
man

Nemisöen.
Herud til dette Paradis

Sommeren,
36

67
,

for at

3T

ombytte
3S

drage utallige
68

Mennesker

om

) Hovedstadens kvælende 69 )

39

40

) finally.

)eleascent.
) played.
) asto) will be repaid.
46
47
45
) literally: the look bovers
) part.
) the globe.
nishing.
48
extends.
) of the world. 4ä ) capital
out, i. e. the view
52
50
) mingle with. 53 ) is bor) immeasurablc. 51 ) farthest.
)

victorious.

vated.

) alloted.

42

41

54

dered.

)
)

wars

(§).

43

5ä

44

66

) amongst which.
) raises
50
) discovers, espies.
) tbe kingdom.
) proinontories.
Cf)'
ß0
63
) view. 61 ) overlooks. f 2 ) woods.
) far beneath oneself.
ei
65
° 7
66
) mentioned.
) spectacles.
) are.
) see p. 78. 68 ) ex69
) suffocating.
change.
) mountain-masses.

57

58

’

110

TALES

ASD

STORIES.

Atmosfære med
Især 71 )

sende,

Bjergenes réne, forfriskende 70 ) Luft.
disse Egne
flittigen af de mange Rej78
gæste ) det skönne Italien, og fremfor ålt71)

besöges
som

af de fremmede Kunstnere 75 ) der

opholde sig i Rom for
Skyld. 76) Staden Albåno, hvis Navn man
ildleder 77 ) af det gamle Alba longa, som har
ligget 78)
der i Nærheden, er hverken smuk eller stör. Dens Folkemængde 79 ) overstiger 80 ) næppe halvtrédie Tusinde Indvaanere, og blandt dens Bygninger kunne vistnok 81 ) kun
faa gjöre Krav paa 82) arkitektonisk Skönhed.
Nogle Ruiner fra Oldtiden, blandt hvilke det saakaldte
Horåtiernes
88
og Curiåtiernes Gravmæle, ) som vel næppe nogensinde
har været et Gravmæle, ère det
eneste, som hér kan
sine Studiers

vække
ner.

Opmærksomhed
Men

den

er

hos Kunstens og Historiens Ven84
) til at fængsle85 )
86
da formaar ) vel det smilende Landskab

Albåno sélv ikke i Stand

Rejsende,
ligger, at fylde Vandrerens Bryst med Glæde
og Beundring over Hespériens hérlige 87) Natürskönhed.
I denne lille Stad opholdt sig 88 en
)
Gang i de varme
Sômmermaancder en ung Riisser, 89) som vi ville kalde
hvori den

Fédor.

Som Sön af

förmuende 90) Köbmand
vår han af sin Fader bléven
en

90

) i St.

Petersborg,
nödsaget 92 ) til
at lægge sig efter 98 ) Handelen, 94 ) men Merkür var alt
for tör 95 ) en Guddom for den fantasirige 96 )
Yngling, der
med sin hele Sjæl tilbad 97) Skiinhedens evige Poesi.
En
Rejse, som den unge Handelsmand en Gang i Forrétnin-

70

7Î

) especially. T2 ) are visited (,]-). TS ) go
) pure, refreshing.
75
T4
76
) artists (p. 62 ).
) most of all.
) on account of,
7T
78
79
bccause of.
) been situated.
) dérivés.
) amount, mim80
82
ber of inhabitants.
) cxceeds. 81 ) certainly.
) make pre83
84
tensions to.
monument.
) sepulchral
) incapable, not able.
8G
83
) captivate.
) can, bas potver. 87 ) excellent, eminent.
89
88
) Russian
®°) wealthy. 9 *) merchant. 92 ) obliged
) lived.
,J3
94
95
to
himself
to.
) commerce.
)
apply
) dry.
") of a
9r
adored.
)
lively imagination.
to see.

TALES

98

111

AjVD STORIES.

gjöre til Frankfurt am Mayn, opflammede 99)
lians Kærlighed til Landskabsmaleriet, 10 °) hvilket han alt >)
længe havde yndet og dyrket a) i sine Fritimer, 3) til den
liöjeste Gråd, og nédsænkte 4) ham i Fortvivlelse 5 ) for
En ulykkelig Lidenskab 6 ) for et Früentimnogen Tid.
der
var
hans Hjærte uværdig, og spillede Gjek med 7 )
mer,
hans Rolighed s) forögede 9 hans dybe 10 ) Misfornøjelse 11 )
med sin Stilling 14 og gjorde ham Opholdet 13 ) i Fædrenelandet forhadt. 14 )
Omsider indsaae 15 ) Faderen, at hans
Sön, ikke var bestemt 16) af Natliren, til at blive en stör
Köbmand, og indvilligede 17 ) i, at Fédor ganske öpofrede 18 )
Den gamle, som aldrig gjorde noget
sig til Kunsten.
19
halvt, tilstod ) end mère 20) den henrykte Yngling en
betydelig Understöttelse, hvorved denne saae sig i Stand
ger

)

maatte

,

til at uddanne

21

) sig i
opholdt sig

terat have

Kunsten i fremmede Lande.
et Par Aar i

Ef22

Tyskland og Svejts, )
drog den unge Landskabsmaler over Alperne néd i Kunst23
af Naturen saa begunstinernes forjættede Land, ) det

gede 25 ) og ved Historien saa ærværdige Hespérien. Med
23
Henrykkelse hilste ) Fédor Rafaels og Michelangelos
Fædreland, da han fra Bjergene forste Gang ojnedc
Det herlige Milano, Bologna
Lombardiets yppige Sletter.
med sine Arkader og Medicæernes Stad,
förer Navn af den skönne, tildroge

som

med Rette 26 )

27

sig ) i höj Grad
Opmærksomhed og Beundring;
alting maatte
den
som
Tiberstad
evige
gjorde
vige for det Indtryk,
hans

,8

men

(commercial)
*) already.
painting.
)

in

sure,

also

called

")

business.
2

)

Fritid.

inflamed.

10

favored and cultivated.
4

)

plunged.

5

)

°) landscape3
) piur. lei6

despair.

)

pas-

9

8

) increas) peace oi mind.
) sported, mocked.
1
10
ed.
*) discontent, disgust
) deep, i. e. high, great.
15
I4
13
) odious.
) perceived, saw.
) his stav.
**) situation.
19
20
17
le
16
) granted.
) more) devoted.
) destined.
) consented.
23
2J
22
over.
) the pro) perfect.
) Germany and Switzerland.

sion.

7

mised

(i.

26

) justly.

e.
27

holy)
)

land,

attracted.

Canaan.

24

)

favored,

2ä

)

saluted

112

TALES

AND

STORIES.

28
dybt bevægede ) Sjæl.

paa hans

Hér svælgede29) han i
Kunstens
og Naturens Skatte, 31 ) ogdrömte
Nydelsen ) af
sig ved Beskuelsen af Oldtidens Mindesmærker
i
30

tilbage

de

da 32 ) Rom

Tider,

dét,

det endnu kunde og
burde være. Hér forglémte den unge Måler33 ) en uhéldig 34) Kærligheds bittre Kvaler, 35) og levede éne for sin

skönne Kunst.

som

For sit Födeland havde

af det omtalte

önskede

var

Forhold

forstyrrede

han paa Grund

vis

Rædsel, 33 ) og
forblive ) saa længe som muligt i det
Skönheden og Historien med Tryllekraft 38)
en

37

at kunne

Land, hvor
fængsle det feilende Gemyt. 39) Han kunde saa meget
mere frit 40 ) nære dette Onske, som han havde tvende 41
)
Brödre hjemme, der vare Faderen behjælpelige 42 ) i hans
Håndelsforretninger, og tillige ànsète 43 ) for atværekyndige 44) i deres Fåg. 45)
Det var en Löverdag Morgen og netop 4e ) den fürste September, da den unge Russer méget
tidlig 47 ) rejste
48
sig ) fra sit Leje, i den llénsigt at gaa üd, for at op49
tage ) et Par Skidser 50) af Albànersüens meestromantiske Partier.
Den klare Himmel oplivede hans Sjæl,
og
snårt stod han færdig 51 ) til sin Vandring.
I en Overkjole 52) af grünt Bömuldstöj, 53) med Vest og Pantalonger
af graat Lærred, 51 ) Sko af ùfarvet 55 ) Læder, og
paa
Hovedet en lysegul 56) Straahat, som var ômvunden med
et rosenrödt Baand, 57) traadte Kunstneren ud af sit VæOm Skulderen hang en Taske, 58) hvori hans
reise.
28

) moved, touched.

sures

(J)

flictions

82

p. 20.

(|)

36

)

might stay,
40
41
) freely.
)
) (vare) ansele,
4G

fession.
ehes.

31

)

i.

e.

two.

were

) just.

4T

)

se

) bag, serip.

uncoloured.

so

37

to

33

30

) pninter.

) and wished

) enjoyment,
34

thought, passed
48

)

) great-coat.
) light-yellow.

for.

3J

) unlueky.

to be

44

)

trea-

3ä

) af-

able to stay,

38
) magic power, charm.
stay.
42
vare
)
behjælpelige, aided,

) early.

62

ready.

55

) revclled, rioted.

) when.

terror.

that he
43

29

) skilied.

35

or

) mind,

assisted.
45

) pro-

(l). 49 ) make. 50 ) sket53
) cotton-stuff. 54 ) linen.
3T
) rose-coloured riband,

rose

:

Tj
TALES

Skidseböger
havde han

Brod;

lille

i Haanden bår han
64

en

i

endnu

var

Siågs,
Vandringer.

som

I Lommen

60

6l

der i Enden

Feltstol 66 ) af dét
paa deres

en

laa.

)
) med Viin og noget
sammenrullet 62 ) Solskjerm 63 )

Kùrveflaske

lang Stang, )
Jtérnspids, og hértil

paa

113

STORIES.

Tégneredskaber 59)

og
en

AN»

var

forsynet med en
65
) en lille
betjéne sig åf67 )

fastbunden

Kunstnerne

Da han havde drukket sin Kaffe

Posthuset, befalede han sin Stöviepudser 68) Raimondo,
et Æsel til Kastel Gandolfo Klokken ni,

at komme med

hvor Kunstneren selv vilde indtræffe til

Tid.

samme

Der-

gik Fédor igjennem Gaderne, hvor han af Almuen 69 )
betrågtet 70) med den godmodige 71 ) Nysgjerrighed, 72)
der er Sydboerne 73 ) saa ejendommelig. 74 )
Saa méget
mére var dette Tilfældet 75 ) hér, som den ünge Månds
Udvortes 76 ) i höj Gråd var i Stand til at gjöre et behågeligt Indtryk paa enhvér, som förste Gang saae ham.
Fédors höje ranke 77 ) Væxt, 78 ) hans livfulde Bevægelser
paa
blév

og råske Gang faldt paa
Hans Ansigtsfarve 80) var

gjérne 82)
politåner.

kunde have

behagelig

en

saa

antaget

Maade i

Öjet. 79)

81

mörk og kraftig, ) at man
ham for en Spånjer eller Nea-

tykke Lokker vare giindsende83) sorte, og hans
som
Ariosto udtrykker sig, to lysende Sole ; ti sjælvare,
Öjne
den have to sorte Öjne funklet 84 ) med et saa betydningsfuldt 85 )
De

Liv og flammende Fölelse som hans.
Naar han betragtede
86
i
Alvaar
nogen
) eller Vréde, da syntes hans Blikke, lig

usynlige 87) Dolke, 88)
90

Inderste, )
5S

men

naar

at

gjénnembore 89
Sjæl var stémt 91 )

ville

hans

Ménneskets
til Mildhed

6Î
) drawing instruments.
) rot) the pocket.
) basket-dask.
63
64
65
66
6T
led up.
) umbrella.
) statf.
)tied.
) field-chair.
) make
60
69
use of.
) boot-cleanser.
) the vulgär, common people.
70
) gazed on. TI ) good natured. 73 ) curiosity. 73 ) the inhabi74
tants of the Southern countries of Europe.
) peculiar. 75 ) the
76
7T
case.
) exterior.
) siender, by a germanism they eay also

60

61

78

slank,
) growth. 79 ) faldt i Öjet, struck the eye. 80 ) com81
) energetic. 82 ) easily. 83 ) glittering. 84 ) sparkled.
plexion.
85
86
88
8T
) significant.
) invisible.
) daggers (|).
) earnest.
90
)the inmost, the very soul. 91 ) disposed.
*®)pierce through.
8

114
og

TARES

Munterhed,

ùdstrommëde

AND

STORIES.

da maatte den blide brændende
Lue, som
Öje, fåst92) være i Stand til at kunne

af hans

smelte det haardeste

Hjærte,

trylle 93)

at

en

Fjende

til

en

Ven, og opvække Kærlighedens almægtige Flamme i det
koldeste Pigehjærte. 94 ) Hans Næse var fiin
og veldannet,
Munden liden og udtryksfuld, 95 ) og de skimt formede
Tænder af en blændende 96 ) Hvidhed, som end mere
forögedes ved den dunkle Farve, der var udbredt 97 ) over An-

sigtets 98) skönne Oval. I Örerne bar han smaa gyldne
Ringe, som stak smukt åf99) mod det råvnesorte 100) Haar
Paa den höjre Haands 'Méllemfinog dunkle Skæg. ')
2
ger ) sad en Ring, hvori der paa mörkeblaa Grund funklede Ordet Amitié i straalende 3) Diamanter. Ved
Afskjeden 4) fra Hjemmet gåv hans Fader ham den med disse
Ord : ”Min Sön ! Kærlighed forbitrede din
Ungdom : maatte 5 ) et trofast 6 ) Venskab,
ægte som disse Diamanter,*forsode 7 ) dig din Manddom !” Dén
Gang troede Fédor, at
en Kunstner var
öphöjet over Amors Paafund, 8) og forlod sit Fædreneland med det
begejstrede Forsæt, 9) at
lève ganske aléne for sin Kunst med
Opofrelse af 10) jordiske Tilböjeligheder. 11 ) Hvorvidt det stod i hans
Magt,
at udfore dette Forsæt eller
ej, vil det Folgende 12)
13
vise.

)

Da den unge Måler

Gader,

nos snævre

drejede

sa
® 6

) almost.
) dazzling.

well,
a

han

made

° 3

til

) charm

()).

a

e

3

r

)

svveeten.

8

i

Soens

gjennem

höje Kyst,
herlige

den

° 4

S8

) maiden’s heart. 95 ) expressive.
) of the (his) face,
") set olf
10

°)
) radiant, sparkling.

when he look leave.

ful.
10

) spread.

naaet

venstre

fine contrast to.

) middle-finger.

kommen üdaf Staden Alba-

og havde

om 14)

8T

var

) may,

) devices,

or

raven
4

)

black.

åt the

) bcard.
(his) leave, i.

would to God that.

tricks.

1

6

) faith—
°) enthusiastic purpose.

) with sacrifice of, i. e.
sacrificing. 11 ) earthly propensities.
) the following, i. e. the
13
succeeding pages.
) show (J).
14
) he turned about.
12

Tj
TALES

Allé, 15 )
imellem

AN»

förer til Kastel

som

Gandolfo.

Smaastæder

disse to

ligger

der

Munkekloster, udenfor hvilket der findes
aaben Plads,

Altere,

omgivet

hvor

Nærmest ved

de

115

STORIES.

Omtrent midt
ved

Vejen

halvrund

en

et
16

)

af Træer

Troende

med mange fritstaaende
forrétte 17 ) deres Andagt. 18 )

lige 19 ) ved den nédgaaende 20)
Skraaning,
ældgammelt 21 ) stort Træ, som
med sine tætte vidtudstrakte skyggefulde Gréne, yder
Vandreren et köligt Hvilested.
Paa en Bænk 22 ) under
dette Træ satte Fédor sig, og tabte sig i Beskuelsen af
det herlige Maleri, som laa lidbredt for hans Öje. Den
klare Morgensol oplyste Soens skovrige 23 ) Brædder, og
Monle Cavos Top spejlede sig 24 ) i den blanke, 25 ) sölvSoen,

næsten

staaer der et

iblaa Vandflade.
Kunstneren

26

Tegnebog ) frem, og begyndte
at skidsére, ) men under Arbejdet 28 ) hénsank han ofte
i saa dybe Tanker, at hans Haand blev liggende 29 ) uvirkHan gjénnemlob i Tanken flére
som 30 ) paa
Papiret.
31
i
sit
Liv, og hans sjælfulde Ansigtstræk32)
Begivenheder )
33
et
tré Spejl, ålt hvad der foregik 34 ) i
som
gjengave, )
tog

en

27

hans Indre.
4(

0!

tænkte

han,

i

det han

med

glædesdrukne

35

)

omkring sig, hvor herligt er ikke Italien?
Med Rette skildre 36 ) Rejsende og Digtere os dette Land
saa skönt, og vistnok bor enhvér, som er saa lykkelig at
betræde 37 ) dets hellige Jordbund, takke Forsynet for en
saadan Gåve, hvorefter saa mange Tusinde forgæves 38 )
stræbe med brændende 39 ) Længsel; 40 ) üden 41 ) nogenBlikke skuede

16
16

)

walk.

) directly,
) woody.

16

semicircular.

)

close.
24

20

) sloping.

1T

le

) perform (J).

ai

)
) bright.

25

22

very old.

) devotion.
form.
bench,
)

26

) poeket-book,
) remained lying,
) during the Work.
S2
30
31
) features.
) accidents.
) inactive, idle.
lay a long while.
36
34
36
33
reflected.
) paint, describe.
) passed.
) joy-drunken.
)
40
38
39
37
in
vain.
ardent,
foot
set
)
longing, desire.
)
)
lipon.
)
23

drawing-book.

41

)

27

was

reflected.

) sketch.

28

29

) withont.
8

*

116
sinde at

TALES

42
ôpnaa ) deres
dig, fordi du

jeg

takker

det

gode

AA»

STORIES.

Öjemed. 43)

Himmelske Fåder !

lod det falde i min

Lod, at betræde Historiens og Skönliedens Land, og gav mig Hjærte
til at fole Naturens évige Herlighed, og Villie til at elske
hos Italiens Indvaanere.

for ofte blive de
som

aldrig

—

griisomt miskjendte,

Ak, desværre, alt41

) isår af Personer,

have været udenfor deres Moders Kökkendör.

Hvor faa

Rejsende gives der dog i Grunden, 45) som nyde
tilbydes dem? Vel forsynede med politiske og
religiöse Fordomme, see de alting fra en falsk Synspunkt,
miskjende Öjeblikkets Herlighed, og forbitre sig enhver
Glæde ved ùtidige Sammenligninger med Hjemmet. Men
hvor ofte angre de 46 ) deres daarlige Adfærd, 47 ) naar den
svundne 48 ) Fryd 49 ) for évig 50 ) er tabt.
Jeg veed mig
51
mine
alle
andre
trods
)
selv,
Svagheder, dôg fri for
denne Fejl. Mit kære Fædreneland; Gud veed, at du er
mit Hjærte kær, men dérfor52) er jeg ikke saa blind for
andre Landes Fortrin, 53 ) at jeg éne og aléne skulde söge
det fortræffelige 54 ) i dit Skod. 55 ) Tilgiv 56 ) mig, at Albanersöens yppige, smilende Brædder forekomme 57 ) mig
skönnere end limensoens taagefulde 58 ) Kyster. Sælsomme
Forvildelse 59) af den skabende 60 ) Natur ! Hvorfor61 ) skulde
jég, i hvis Aarer 62 ) Sydens héde Blöd flammer i sin hele
Lüe, 63 ) just fodes 64 ) ved Névas iskolde Vande under den
trésindstyvende Bréddegrad ? 65 ) Herre Gud! Du kunde jo
ligesaa godt have ladet mig see Dagens Lys ved det viinrige Astrachan eller paa det blomstrende 66) Krimm. Der
have vi jo ogsaa Viindruer 67 ) évig glödende Röser
og
duftende68 ) Meloner ligesom hér.
Jeg havde da paa een
det der

,

42

44

43
) misjudged. 45 ) in faet (|).
) aim, end.
) reaching.
4r
) do they repent.
)foolish behaviour. 4e ) gone past. 49 )joy.
50
) eternally. 51 ) in spite of, notwithstanding. 52 ) for all that.
46

63

) superiority (f). 54 ) the excellent, i. e. excellency. 55 ) lap,
46
) forgive! 37 ) appear. ss ) foggy. ") mistake. ,0 ) créa61
62
) vvhy?
) veins, also oars (i). 63 ) flame, 64 ) be born.
ting.
• 5
) degree of latitude. 66 ) florid. 6T ) grapes, 68 ) fragrant.
bosom.

TALES

Gang

været baade

AS»

117

STOKIES.

Sydbo og en Russer, jeg havde da
69
Isklumper og Snedynger ) ved deu

en

ikke frusset mellem

kan
Bugt. 70) Dog hvortil détte? Landskabsmaleren
fremmede
i
vel elske det pittoreske, det hénrykkende
Landes Natürskönheder, og mindes det med vemodig
men MénneLængsel, naar han ej mere har det for Öje,
72
71
Tilskikkelser
Skæbnens
i
) med
sket maa finde sig
)
74
73
Himlen
hvor
i
den
Kreds, )
Taalmédighed, og virke )
76
har hénsat 75 ) ham.
Unyttigt ) er det at spilde Tiden
78
med tomme Klager; 77 ) dérfor vil-jeg ikke plage ) mig
heller
med Bekymringer 79 ) over de svundne Dage, ej
grüble over80) min Frémtids Skæbne, men nyde Ojeblik82
81
kets élskelige Lyst med Taknémmelighed. ) Ja, dejlige )
84
Italien, du èr en Bålsom 83 ) for mit saarede ) Hjærte,
finske

Kvaler, hvormed den falske Natålias Tro89
88
löshed ) sönderrev 87 ) min Sjæl.
Smértelige ) Minde )
tröste90
om en fordærvelig ) Lidenskab, vig for Natürens

du stiller 85 ) de
86

hvorledes
91
rige ) Skönhcd. Ha! yndige, falske Slange, )
kunde du saa letsindig 93 ) forglemme min Kærlighed, og
94
lönne min varme Troskab med Meenéd ? ) I lange Aar
95
Faders
din
tilbad jeg dig, lindrede )
sörgelige Stilling,
97
96
et
Död
vénligt Ly ) unog forskaffede ) dig ved hans
Og saaleder mine kære Forældres 98 ) gæstfri 99 ) Tåg.
du
des gjéngjælder du mig!
O, Taknémmelighed! var
Ak, nej! Kærlighed er
da aldrig Kærligheds Moder?
100
Den
Himlens Datter, og födes ej af jordiske Drifter. )
92

—

—

ro
) the gulf of Finheaps of snow.
73
72
fate.
) act (f).
land,
) decrces of
) put up with, bear.
77
76
75
74
useless.
) empty
)
) placed.
) circle, cycle, sphere.
80
79
muse upon.
78
)
torment.
) griefs, (piur. f).
)
complaints.
8ä
84
83
81
) soothest.
) wounded.
) balm,
) gratitude. 82 ) fair,

69

) lumps,

masses

of ice &

7I

) sore, doleful.
) faithlessness. 8r ) tore to pieces, broke.
9I
90
") snake,
in
comfort.
) rieh
) pernicious.
) remembrance.
95
94
alleviated.
93
)
) perjury.
) fickly, inconsideråtely.
viper.
99
98
97
9C
) hospishelter.
alfordcd
)
parents.
)
) furuished,
({■),
88

86

89

table,

10

°) instincts.

118
er

fri

som

AND

TALES

STORIES.

Luften paa Bjergene, og flygter for Lænker
‘)
) Ja ! jeg foler det. Natalia svor mig Tro-

2

og Tvang.
skab af Taknémmelighed, og derfor hævnede den fornærmede 3 ) Natur sig paa hende, da Ivan smeltede den falskes Bryst.
Dog hvorfor hykle 4 ) Fölelser, hun ikke
nærede ! Min
Troskab blev

grændselose 5 ) Hengivenhed,
til

Latter, 7 )

da hun

i

min

prövede 6 )

Ivans Arme drev

Gjék med 8) Tro og Love. 9 ) O, Natalia, vildt kastede
du dig i hans Favn! 10 ) er du da
lykkelig ved hans Side?
Er du det virkelig? Elsker han
dig da?
—

En Taare stod i Fédors

Öje,

da

han mindedes sin

Ungdoms Kærlighed, men snart fattede han sig, 11 ) gréb 12)
sin Crayon, og tegnede atter. 13 ) ”Ak! tænkte
han, hvi
anklager 14 ) jeg da hende? Kan en Mårmorstotte 15 ) besjæles af Lidenskab, en Istap 16 ) giode af brændende Fölelse?
Nej, nej! jo mere 17) jeg overtænker dette usålige 19)
Forhold, jo mere indseer jeg, at det ikke var Kærlighed,
ihvorvél 19) det har forbitret mig min
Ungdoms skönneste
Dage. Men bort 20) med dette! Jeg opgiver 21 ) for évig
enhvér Fordring 22) paa den Lykke at elske
og elskes
Kun 24 ) i dit
igjén, og glemmer mine Forvildelser. 23 )
Tempel, Natür! vil jeg knæle, og paa dit Alter, o hellige 25 ) Kunst, ofrer jeg frivillig26) mit Hjærtes Fölelser.
Jeg er nu fem og tyve Aar gammel, det er nü paa Tiden 27) at blive klog. 28)
—

Saaledes filosoférede Kunstneren

arbejdede
*)

chains

derhos

2

(§).

)

flittigen.
constraint.

en

Men da han

3

rum
var

Tid, 29 )

og
lidt lidmat-

) injured, offended.
turned lo ridicule.

4

) feign.
)
) unbounded.
)
) sported
9
vvith.
) faith and promise, Love, is derived from the Germ. Glaube,
belief, trust. 10 ) fathom, embrace. 11 ) recovered himself. 12 )took
,3
) sketched on (again). 14 ) complain of. 15 ) marblestatue.
up.
16
ir
8
icicle.
)
) the more. * ) unhappy. 19 ) although. 20 ) away.
21
22
23
24
25
claim.
renounce.
)
)
) errors.
) sacred.
) only.
i7
J6
) voluntarily.
) high time. 28 ) wise. 29 ) a long -while, they
say also, but it is a Germanism, en Tid lang
5

6

tried.

T

was

,

8

AND

TALES

119

STORIES.

31
forrige ) Dags Arbejde, og nu destide«
saa begyndte han at
saa tidlig havde forladt sit Leje,
Han satte sig derfor mere mågelig32 ) paa
blive sövnig.
33
Bænken, lænede Ryggen ) mod Træets tykke Stamme,
Det vårede 34 ) ikke
og lagde sin Tégnebog paa Sködet.
36
med Hovedet, og
længe, förend han begyndte at nikke )
snårt faldt han i en dyb vederkvægende Slummer, hvorved hans Tégnebog gled néd paa Jorden, og blév lig36
den halvrunde Plads,
gende ôpslagen ) med en Skidse af
I Förstningen 37 ) slumrede han
han sad.
hvilken
paa
39
hans Fantasi at
rolig; 38) men efterhaånden ) begyndte
41
40
sélsomme
)
i
Forestillinger og
tumle sig )
mångehaande
42
til
en mærkelig
ordnede
sig )
Billeder, der omsider

tet 30 ) af den

Dröm,

som

43
vi hermed ville méddele )

Det forekom

ham,

som

om

nödte ham til

44

vore

Læsere.

) uforudsete Omstænat maatte forlåde Ita-

pludselig,
45
Hjem. Med Ranselen ) paa
tilbåge
stod han med
Ryggen og en Våndringsstav i Haanden,
47
hvilken
der bevæ46
en
eet ) foran
meget lang Bro, ) paa
i det daglige Livs
Mennesker
Tilsende
gede sig mange
49 Hav
yderst50)
Sysler.48) Under den var det grændselôse )
61
Bund
det
ligeledes
klärt og gjénnemsigtigt ) paa hvis
53
vrimlede af 52) utallige Mennesker, der vogtede ) deres
Forretninger, ligesaa frit og ùhindret som Vandrerne
Op af Bölgernes Overflade hævede sig et
paa Broen.
blændende hvidt Skelet med glimrende Vinger og en gyl55
den Lé. 54 ) I dets Aasyn, ) skimt kun en Knokkelbyg57
56
Fédor stùdsede 58 ) ved
ning, ) laa Mildhed og Frèd. )

digheder

til sit

lien, og vende

,

31
)
) wearied.
34
was.
) lasted,

30

preceding.
35

)

nod.

a2
36

)

commodiously.

) open.

37

33

) back.

) the beginning.

40
39
) ramble, rove.
) by little and little.
) quietly, softly.
43
42
communicate to.
themselves.
)
) arranged
) wonderful.
48
47
46
45
44
) occupations.
at
once.
if.
wallet.
)
)
bridge.
)
) as
S2
51
50
49
) swarmed
)
transparent.
boundless.
) exceedingly.
)
is
55
54
53
) struc) countenance.
) scythe.
with.
) attended to.
38
5T
at.
ture of bones.
) started
) peace.

35

41

*

120

TALES

AND

STORIES.

Dette er ikke den lille Vin) og tænkte:
til
min
Faders
Landsted , 60 ) og dog
debro, som förer
mig für, at jeg saae Huset selv og Haven, som

disse

Syner,

59

(l

syntes

omgiver

det

I

det.

han

ubekjéndt

tilhviskede

et

densbroen,

som

anstillede disse
Væsen ham

:

61

)

Betragtninger
(l

Dette

förer til Fuldkommenhedens

er Livets Genius og Skelettet med den
dens Genius.

Vér-

er
62

Borg.
gyldne Lé er

)

Du
Dö-

Fédor, at han
forandredes ) i sit héle Væsen. Hans sædvanlige jördiske Drågt 64 ) sank ned, og han indhylledes 65 ) i et straa67
lende hvidt Klædebon. 66 ) Der voxte hvide Vinger frem )
af hans Skiildre, og hans héle Legeme hitredes 68 ) af
Ved

Lyden

af disse Ord forekom det

63

gjénnetnskuede med Klarhed héle Jord69
livets Færd,
sig i en uéndelig ) Gråd öphöjet
Han
saae sig omkring med
över det menneskelige Kön.
71
ædel öphöjet Anstand, ) og Vandrerne paa Bröen betragSkelettet saae
tede ham med Ærbôdighed 71 ) og Frygt.
smilende op til ham, og sagde: Vær 72) mig vélkornmen
ætérisk Ild.

Han

og fölte

it

73
) mine OfFere.” 74 )
unddrag mig
Nei, svarede Fédor, Livets Fyrste kjender ingen Uret75
færdighed. ) De svage Dödelige elske mig og hade
76
dig, og dôg ) lève de hos dig som hos mig.” Med
disse Ord vinkede77 ) han ad en Mand, som gik ham forbi.
Denne nærmede sig skjælvende, men Fédor gréb ham
med overnaturlig Kraft, og slyngede ham lid i Bölgerne.
Gaa! sagde han, du er moden 78 ) til Döden. Forsvind af
Livet, og gjör Plads for andre ! Den ulyksalige sank med

min

Bröder,

ikke

og

Syne without ptur. is appearance, show.
) tilliv, ham, whispered to him (p. 72).
*°) country-seat.
63
62
) was changed, transformed.
) the castle of perfection.
67
66
*4
5
) voxte frem,
) garaient.
) clothing.
*) was covered.
S9
T0
C8
infinite.
)
) dig) was purified.
grew forth, shot fortli.
72
73
71
be
!
do
not
withdraw.
veneration.
)
)
(p. 40).
)
nity.
77
r6
7ä
) nevertheless.
) beckoned.
) injustice.
’*) victims.
78
) ripe.
i9

) visions (§),

but

61

TALES

et

Skrig

AMD

STORIES.

néd i de klare

Vande, men
Lé, bevægede

79

121

da Döden berörte

han sig med forsagte ) med sin
nyet Munterhed og Kraft paa Havets Bund. Skelettet

ham

takkede Fédor med et

venligt Nik, og sank derpaa néd i
Livets Génius skréd videre frem 80 ) paa Broen,
sin Broder Döden mangt et Offer.
Omsider

Bölgerne.
og bragde
da Fédor
en

nær

var

dejlig Pige,

ved den modsatte

som

lignede

lia, og hviskede til ham:

Kyst,

nærmede

sig

hans fordums elskede Natå(i

Her

er

Fuldkommenhedens

81
paa denne Klippelinde. )
Jeg förer 82) dig derhen.”
Fédor betragtede hende studsende 83) og sagde:
Du ér

Borg

tl

dog Natalia, og stoler paa81 ) min jordiske Svaghed. Men
jeg siger dig for forste og sidste Gang; misbrug åldrig
mit
laa

Vénskab,

ti éllers bliver 85 ) du «traffet. 36 )

Foran dem

paa el truende

Fjeld, 87 ) og Vejen derhen gik
iméllem Torne og Krat ved Siden af umaalelige Afgrunde. 88 )
Da gréb 89 ) Natalia en mödende Vandrer, og kastede ham
fra Klippetinden néd i Bjergets dybeste Klöfter. 90 ) Gÿsende 91 ) bemærkede 92 ) Fédor dette, og üdbröd 93 ) i dyb
Beviégelse : Det er forbi. Dit jordiske Liv er endt !
Nü kommer Düdens Génius op af denne Brönd, 94 ) og
förer dig bort." I det han frémférte 95 ) disse Ord, stode
de begge i en mörk Hvælving 96 ) i Borgen ved Siden af
97
en ilhyre
) dyb Brönd.
Op af dens Svælg stég Döden,
Natalia
ved
Haanden, for at léde hende derhén;
og tég
men den fortvivlede 98 ) Pige
omslyngede 99 ) Fédor med
Hæftighed, og bad om Skaansel. 100 ) Da svarede denne
med Taarer :
Jeg kan ikke redde ■) dig ! jeg inaa selv
en
Gang nédstige 2) i Brönden, naar Himlens Herre 3)
Borgen

(l

u

79

80

) softly, gcnlly.
) advanced fartlier. el )suinmit of the rock.
83
I
will
)
) amazed. 84 ) trust to. 85 ) shall be.
bring, lead.
e6
87
88
mountain.
) punished.
)
) abysses. 89 ) seized. 90 ) clefts.
91
) shuddering. 9ï ) perccived. 93 ) broke forlh, cried out.
95
94
96
9T
) spoke,
) well.
) vault.
) excessively, terribly.
9e
90
) desperate.
) wound herself about, cleaved to. I0 °) indulJ
2
) save.
gence, mercy.
) descend. 3 ) the lord of heaven.
® 2

122

TALES

A:VD STOUIES.

Tingenes Orden.’’ Med disse Ord slap 5 )
den’trösteslöse G ) Mö, 7 ) ogDöden styrtede 8) hende

omvælter

4

)

denne

Fédor
10
néd i Brönden. Jàmmertoner 9 ) löde fra det rædsomme )
Dyb. Nii vendte Fédor sig til Duden, og sagde : Min.

ôgsaa jeg maa en Gang ) nedstige i dit Rige.
12
Modtag mig da vénligen. Mit Hjærte trænger til ) Kæret himmelsk 13 ) Smil paa
saae Döden
med
Da
lighed.
14
ham, og trykte hans Haand med uendelig Varme mod )
sit Bryst.
„Döden er Livet”, sagde han, J mit Rige
15
Stövet
) sig som i dit; dit er en evig Omvexbevæger
17
16
af
)
Tingene, og alt dette er kun Forberedelse. )
ling
11

Broder!

(

Vi tö vide intet.
af fuldkomne

Over 18)

Aander.

os

ère der

Ord foråndrede Skelettets héle Udvortes
19

straalede ) i

en

uendelige

Men vi ère Venner.”
20

sig:
21

uforkrænkelig ) Glorie, )

Gråder

Ved disse
dets

Aasyn

og dets héle

23
Skabning 22) antog ) saa skönne og ædle Former, som
Det hérligste meest fulddet dödelige Öje aldrig skuer.
endte 24 ) Væsen, med Salighedens 25 ) reneste Udtryk i sine
27
Miner, 26) stod for Fédor, som fölte sig betåget ) af unævnelig hellig Fryd. Den skönne forædlede Génius sank
2S
til sin Broders Hjærte, og en Ånelse ) af den himmel29
ske Reenhed ) faldt i Fédors Sjæl. Han vilde tåle, men
Læben nægtede 30 ) ham sin Tiéneste. Hans Hjærte mægtede ikke 31 ) at bære denne overjordiske Sålighed, og
32
han
vaagnede. )

f
6
5
maid. 8 ) precip) destroyes. ) let loose, let go. ) inconsolable. )
1
10
9
dreadful.
>) one day,
)
itated, hurled. ) tones of lamentation.
14
13
heavenlv.
) to.
,2
of.
need
) celestial,
atlast.
) stands in
,T
le
transmutation.
)
l5
préparation.
mankind.
)
) the dust,
21
20
) ra19
1S
) incorruptible, imperishable.
) beamed.
) above.
24
23
fmished,
2a
perfect.
)
) assumed.
diance.
) sliape, person.
28
2T
26
) per25
) seized, stunned.
) countenance.
) béatitude.
32
3
30
awoke.
29
was
unable.
denied.
)
>)
idea.
)
) purity.
ccption,
4

123

KONG VALDEMARS DATTER OG ALKORS SON.
Et

Iler

af

Æventyr

Nyerups

Idunna for 1812.

2
Konning ') ved Öster-Strand, )
4
Kong Valdemar liédte 3 ) den bolde, )
han raadte 5 ) ej over Riger og Land,
6
og ej over grönne Volde; )
7
han aate ) en Borg saa brat 8 ) og fast,

vår

en

9
og dertil vel tusinde Snækker )
med Silkesejl og forgylden Mast:
10
saa vide hans Vælde
) sig strækker.

11

)

Om Vinteren sad han paa bratten Borg
alt 12 ) med sine Kæmper 13 ) tilsammen ; 14 )

da drukke de

Mjödcn

foruden

Sorg,

og Vinen den klare med Gammen.
Naar Solen skinned’ i grönnen Vang
17

Gjögen

og
da

hejsed 20)

at

gæste

Om

22

)

18

)

19

i

gale ) Lunde, )
Sejl med Spil 21 ) og med Sang,

mon

han

16

) de bretlandske 23 ) Sunde. 24 )

Hosten, 25 )

og Stormen

naar

Voven

begyndte

at

ej

mere var

bjælde,

27

huld,

26

)

)

3
2
*) poet. for Konge, king. ) for Östersö-en, tlie Baltic. ) for
6
5
4
the
brave, gallant (bold).
) poet.
) reigned.
)
hed, p, 46.
7
) an old
or Norwegian for Mark, field. Swed. rall, Icel. rällr.

poet. form for ejede possessed.

[ft

is

the

past

tense

ål li of the

8
) steep [it means
eiga, to possess, kd].
ia
10
41
9
)
) extends.
) power.
lofty, beetling. ed.].
) vessels.
13
14
an
old
a
)
)
all,
poet. expletive.
champions.
together,
ie
Germanism. 15 ) mirtli, joy. l6 ) field. IT ) the cuckoo.
) did
19
20
21
crow, sing.
) groves, woods.
) play, music.
) hoisted.
22
) visit. 23 ) British. 24 ) soands, strath. '“) harvest, antumn.

Icelandic

2S

verb

) favorable.

2T

) howl.

124

POET1CAL

EXTRACTS.

med Sölv og med
med Trælle.

drog han tilbage'
med kostelig Yin og
da

Guld,

var saa saare 28

) rig paa Guld,
30
29
paa Tårner ) og favre Svende, )
31
men al sin Kienöd
) han agted som Muld

Han

mod Hilda hans Datter hin
33

vænne.

32

mangen Ridder

gilied )
droge saa vide Veje,

Hende
de

saa

)

skön,

hun havde kaaret 34 ) Prins Rerik i

men

Lön, 35)

ham maatte hun ikke
Hans Fader

af

var

éje.
36
Alkor, den Stölkonge )

Hjærtet Kong

gram;

Valdemar hadede ham.

De våre Fostbrödre 37 ) i

38
Ungdommens Vaar; )

fjendske 39 ) i Manddommens Aar.
40
drog paa Leding ) üd,
hundrede Kæmper tilbage,
42
41
skulde forsvare den Mö ) saa pnid, )

de bléve

saa

Naar Valdemar
blev
som

43
og tage paa hende vel Vare. )
44
Da törde ) hun aldrig af Buret

blev hende Tiden

dog

45

) gaa,

ej lang:

hun dansed med sine Tærner smaa,

slog Guldharpen og sang;
sömmede 46) hun med roden Guld,
4T
var vund,
)
og naar hendes Finger
48
saa légte
) hun med sin liden Hund,

hun
saa

Issegrim var baade væn og huld.
gik ned bag Skovens Top,
saa lit i Höjenloft op,
hun
tren

smaa

Naar Solen
da

30

)
) hand-maids, giris,
32
) fair.
Gernianism for Klenodie.

28

)

a

so

very.

29

fine lads.
33

31

) treasure,

) approved, eourted.

36
35
) literally: throne-hing i.
) privately, secretly.
) chosen.
39
3e
37
friends.
sworn
) hostile.
) spring.
c.
)
grcat lting.
42
41
40
excellent.
maid.
fine,
)
naval
)
elegant,
expédition.
)
4S
44
43
) cage ;
) durst (p. 43).
) tage Vare paa, attend, talte care of.
43
) sowed, stitched.
small, separate dwellinghouse ; a lady’s bower.
34

47

) wounded (by the needle),

48

) played.

POETICAL

125

EXTRACTS.

hviden Strand, 49 )
og saae hen ud over
50
hvor Havfruen ) legte i klaren Vand.
Da saae hun og tit til de gamle Linde,

51

)

hvorunder hun légte med Rerik saa frö,
alt förend de Fædre blev fjendske i Sinde,
alt förend Prins Rerik i
Da kvad hun:

hvor

du

svæver

nu

Leding uddrog.
52
)
Rölgen blaa?

Rerik! hvor est

„Prins

paa

du min Ven?

er rundne hen,
Sju ) lange
saae.
mit
Öje
dig
55
Ak! har du forgæt 54 ) din Barndoms ) Mö,
56
maa
dö.”
af
Kummer
da ) Hilda
og Sorrig
57
hun
En Kvæld ) som i Höjenloft
sad,
og saae, hvor de Havfruer légte saa glad,

Vintre

53

siden

og hörte hvor Aftenens Vinde
mon suse igjennem de Linde.
Fra Lindenes mörke Kroner

58

klang 59)
saa yndelig
)
Harpesang:
„Jeg réd saa vide om Bjerg og Sö,
gjennem mörken Skov og dybe Dale,
men ingensteds fandt jeg den vænne Mo,
der kunde mit Hjærte husvale. 61 )
saadan

60

Ak! Elskov klemmer 62)

Naar Snækken

gled

klang Vovernes

Hangeren

naar

löd

over

Pladsken
traved

)

en

f3

)

saa

saare;

Bolgen blaa,
Hildas Sange;

som

over

Heden graa,

Gangerens Fodslag som Harpens Strenge,
Hilda slog under Linden.

som

51

) iiinctrees. ä2 ) art,
) forgot, an archaism
)
poet.
56
for forgættet, poet. for forglemt. 5 ‘) of thy childhood.
) then.
äT
59
5S
6
) night, late evening.
)sonnded.
°) grâce) crowns, tops.
81
ful, charming.
) comfort. 62 ) presses, wrings. * 3 ) trotted, for
49

)

sea

or

for

travede
cases«

seashore.

er.

(J)

i3

50

) the mermaid.

seven, poet. for syv.

thus in the

following

e

is

5i

frequently

omitted in similar

126

Jeg

POETICAI*

Hildas Billed’ i

Öjet

naar

til Himlen

EXTRACTS.

Skyen saae,
jeg hæved,

og stirred jeg dybt ned i Havets
hendes Billed imöde mig svæved,
ti Elskov klemmer
Hvor est

Hilda!

saa

Blaa,

saare!
64

lyt ) til min Sang,
il
til
mit
bankende
og
Hjærte!
i Barndommens Yaar ved Harpens Klang
du selv jo at elske mig lærte, 65 )
naar Harpen du slog under Linden,
du,

o

Ak! Elskov klemmer

saa

saare!”

Nu tav den tonende

Og

Harpe brat, 66)
lyttede længe;

Hilda

ingen Töne i mörke Nat
klang mere fra Harpens Strenge.

men

Kun Vinden sused i Lindens

Grene,

og Bolgen pladsked mod Strandens Stene.
Da greb hun Harpen og sagte rörte
de gyldne Strenge, og Vinden forte

igjennem

Mörket de svage Toner

hen til de

gamle Lindekroner :
I énsomt Bur, en Diie 67 ) lig,
maa Hilda kvæde sörgelig; 68 )
knap 69 ) tor hun Harpens Strenge röre,
at ej de Tærner deres Klang skal höre;
knap tör hun nynne saa sagtelig:
min Hjærtens Ven! jeg elsker dig.

(l

Ak! Elskov klemmer

saa

Nu sidder Hilda hver Kvæld

saare.”
saa

Rerik kvæder i Lunden;
skönt tykke Mure dem skiller

glad,

mens

de have

dog Sorgen

ad,

forvunden.

70

)

) tlie imperative from jeg lytter, Ï hearken, listen.
68
6r
) melancholy.
) dove, pigeon.
) suddenly.
70
otherwise næppe,
) repaired, forgot.
®4
66

65

69

) taughtst.
) scarcely,

POETICAL EXTRACTS.

Men hör

Solen

naar

skön

mig,

Til Gammen

72

127

Jomfru, og mærk derpaa 71 )
Sorg sig mon 73) vende,

) til

klarest 74 ) paa Himlen
Uvejret 75 ) behænde. 76)

som

da kommer

Det lakked

nu

77

alt ad

mon

staa,

) Hostens Tid,

og Vinden fra Vesten mon stande, 7S )
de Vikinger 79 ) ile fra Bretland hid
alt

de skummende 80)

over

Vande,

paa Voven danse de Snekker blaa,
i Skoven hvirvle de Blade smaa.
Det stormer

hårdt

saa

over

Vesterhav, S1 )

de

Bolger styrte som Bjerge mod Stranden.
du, kær Fader, i Bolgen din Grav,
da dör din Hilda, jeg siger for
Sanden,
mit Hjærte da brister 82 ) af
Sorgen.”
Det tordner 88) i Vesten, det
lyner 84) saa brat 85)
den Taarnevægter 86 ) blæser 87 ) om mörken
Nat,
det runger 88) saa höjt udi
Borgen;
fra Stranden hores som
Vaabengny, 89)
de Kæmper raabe i vilden
Sky;
da kiger 90 ) Maanen saa
listelig 91 )
bag Skyen frem over hviden Böige.
92
Det èr Kong Valdemar
gæv ) og rig,
fra Brétlands Tog 93 ) med alt sit
Folge; 94)
det er Kong Valdemar stolt
og prud
(l

Ak! fandt

alt med sine tusinde Snækker.

71

) attend to it, think
clearest, brightest.

the
77

)

literally:

stand.
or

79

)

German

ens.

novv

75

sca-champions,sea-heroes.
ocean.

8i

82

) will

) frequently,
88
) resounds.

horn).
ishly, slyly.
91

it

72

) joy, mirtli. 73 ) will, may. ri ) at
) bad weather, storm. T6 ) nimbly, hastily,
already approached to. 7S ) poet. for slaa,
on.

) retinue.

97

burst

86
89

)

) excellent.

(f p.

80

)foaming. 81 ) tlicIVorth-sea,
49). 83 ) thunders, 81 ) light-

) tower-watchman.
noise of
93

arms.

90

8r

) blows (his
) peeps. 91 ) rogu-

) from (his) expédition

to

Britain.

128

EXTRACTS.

POETICAL

fra

Höjeuloft ud;
95
Silkesejl Stranden bedækker : )

Skön Hilda
de

”Nu Ivrist

seer

lovet i

være

Himmerig!

jeg snart kan favne dig.”
De Kæmper sidde ved breden Bord,
de drikke baade Ö1 og Mjöd ;
de vexle 96 ) saa mangt et skjemtsomt 91 ) Ord,

kær Fader!

ti Vinen den smager
I

Hôjsædet

98

saa

söd.

) sidder den

Konning god,

ved Siden skön Hilda det Rosenblod.
I Hallen triner

en

klædt i Maar ’) og
Forst hilser 3 ) han den
var

")

ind, 10°)

Ridder

Skarlagenskind. 2)
Konning god,

hilser han Hilda det Rosenblod.

saa

eder, Kong Valdemar bold!
5
Kong Alkor la’r ) eder hilse;
8
6
1 ) stréde ') saa ofte med Avindsskjold )
4

Hil

)

være

9

begge til liden Frelse ; )
10
er til Forlig
) han og Venskab bered,

eder
nu

han
om

11
tryg ) en Fred,
I ham vil vide 12 ) en Bön.

byder

I haver

eder

saa

Datter,

en

saa

væn 13 ) en

Mö

der findes vel næppe paa Verdens Ö,
hende fæste 14 ) I Rerik, Kong Alkors Son.”

„Nej!” skreg Kong Valdemar, var saa
„ret aldrig min Datter skal fæste ham!

gram,

15

)

96
) on the throne,
) sportful.
) interchange.
) cover.
1
maiden.
for
°°) fricréature,
stands
poetically
") Blod, biood,
2
1
skin,
Skind,
mårten (-skin).
)
)
50).
ner
p.
ind, enters, (f
J
) greets, sahtis here put poetically for cloak furred with skin.
9T

95

tes.

tag)-

4

) for lader, lets (you greet, i. e. sends you greete
r
) shield or arms of
) fought (f p. 50).
(both).
10
9
rancour.
) réconciliation.
) Salvation, benefit, gain.

) hail.
6

)

S8

5

y° u

envy, i. e.
1 2
) grant, a poet. expression Icel. veita.
»') safe, secure (p, 27).
i5
14
,3
) (he)
) betroth, optative (f).
) so fine, equally fine.
was

so

(very)

angry

or

hateful.

POETICAL EXTKACTS.

aldrig min Datter
Nidding er Alkor,

ret

En

129

Nidding 16) skal faa.
deslige : 17 )

en

hans Sön

för skal hun

som Mö udi Kloster
gaa
fæste
og
sig Brudgom i Himmerige.”
Den Ridder ham svarer
sömmelig: 18)

„Herre Konning!

du ikke forivre

Dig!” 19 )
han vidste at foje ) sin Tale saa
godt,
„Kong Alkor er Rysalands mægtige Drot, 21 )
20

Prins Rerik

Ridder med Ære:

en

hvad han faar

Ej Niddinger

„Spar 22)

du dine

Ud ganger

ej

var

men

for

25

ej

)

saa

28

21
stoppe ) dig.”
skyndelig, 20 )

saa

dvæle;

blég

et

som

hun kunde ei mæle

Nu lider det

tager med Magt.

Uselig, 23 )

Munden skal

den Ridder

Hilda sidder

han

Ridder

Ord,

sikkert at

ret

Sorrig

Gode,

de være.”

monne

hvis mit Sværd
det

med

ej

) Maaneder

2T

Lig,

),

fire og

fem,

de Hiiskarle drikke
og kvæde;
men Hilda saa saare mon

græde. 29)

Nu lider det alt til Vaaren frem:

höjt

Solen skinner paa klaren

og Gjögen galer i gronne
de Huskarle stunde til 30)

Vove,
Skove;

Ledingsfærd,

skön Hilda

sig önsker i sorten Jord.
Men Valdemar pönser 31 ) saa
mangelund, 32)
han
10

)

but

a
a
”

frygter

for Alkors lumske

scoundrel.
mean

laers

[Nidding.

récréant,

a

Icel.

Fund, 33 )
is not a plain scoundrel
Where the Icelandic sagas

ni&ingr

vile traitor.

Italian poets use the
ni&ingr”,
expression
1 7
18
falsissimo iraditore, false traitor. bd ]
) also,
) decently.
courteously. 10 ) do not get into passion, optât (i). 20 ) manage,
dispose ('). 21 ) lord, poet. 32 ) spare, forbear, 23 ) Sir Pitiful.
24
) stop, (bung the niouth, i. e silence). 25 ) goes,
poet for gaar.
26
) hastily. 2T ) speak. 28 ) it goes i. e. there pass. 29 ) did
weep.
30
32
) think on, préparé. 31 ) muses, méditâtes.
) many ways,
33
) eunning devices.
poet.

say

manns

the

+

9

130

POETICAI/

han kalder

nu

for

sig

de bedste i Gaarden

84

EXTRACTS.

de Huskarle

)

sju,

mon være.

I sværge en Ed, I sværge mig-nu
<(
ved Krist og hans Moder kære;
35
I være mig tro, I tie kvær, )
I

I

sige ej frå, hvad jeg byder jer.
36
folge mig nu med Öxe hver )

Hakke 37 )
og hver med sin bréde
til Mörkveds Skov; naar vi komme
saa ville vi videre snakke.”

dér,

Og dér de kom til Mörkveds Skov,
39
38
begyndte de fliigs ) at grave ; )
40
en Hule
) saa dyb i Jorden de grov,
43
) vilde de lave : )
44
foroven bedækket med Stén ) og Muld,

en

Stüe

41

)

saa

4a

behængt
bragde Kong

forinden
Did

med Sölv og med Guld,
Valdemar alt sit Klenôd,

baade Guld og kostbare Vare,
46
45
og dertil alsköns ) Fetalje )

god,

Mjöd og Vinen klare.
Saa ledte 47) han did kær Datter sin
med hendes T ær ner trende.
baade

(1

Jeg

haver beredt

en

Stue fin

43
med Sölv og med Guld behænde, )
49
Brand:
mod
Solens
den er saa köl )
51
der vælder 50 ) en Kilde ) af hviden Sand,

som

Perlen rén

er

dens klare Vand.

3ä
) tie, be silent, opfat, (f p. 45), kvær, poet.
) the house.
36
) eacli.
adverb, still, silently, i. e. presen e the secret religiously,
40
3 J
38
3r
i
) cavern.
) dig (f p. 44).
) immediately.
) mattock.
44
43
42
41
) sto) préparé, niake.
) room.
) an expletive particle.
46
low
45
victuals
divers.
[a
e.
)
of
i,
nes (p. 25).
)
every kind,
47
j lead,
ed.]
German corruption of the Latin word viclualia.
34

'

eondueted.

kolig,

so

48

) dexterously, artificially.

) springs fortil,

51

) fountain.

49

) cool,

a

Germanism for

1
POKTICAIi

I dvæle
mens

til Hosten
i

hér vel Maaneder

nu

jeg

paa
53

Bolgen

fem,
52

)
glade hjem

maa

) komme vi

131

EXTtfACTS.

svæve,

og Gammen at leve.”
Dernede
den sorte Grav jeg seer,
.
kær Fader! jeg siger for Sanden:

Lyst

kommer

jeg dernéd,

ret

51

) aldrig mér
glade skiie hinanden.
..Stig ned, stig ned, min Datter kær!
det er saa lystigt at leve dér.
Trindtom i Bogens 55 ) Sale 56)
saa liflig 57 )
synge de Nattergale. 58)
Stig néd, stig néd, min Datter kær!
der er saa hérligt at lève.
For Hulder 59) og Höjbo 60) du
frygte ej 01 ) dér,
vi Kors ° 2) i Dörstölperne 63
) skréve.
Du béde en Bön 61 ) hver
Morgenstund,
hver Aften.du ganger til Hvile,
saa vogte 65 )
Sinaaéngle om din Blund, 6e)
bær’
og
dig paa Armene sine.”
..Farvel da, kær Fader! du seer mig ej mér!
det Lofte du maa mig dog give,
at sende mit Hjærte, naar död
jeg ér,
til Rerik; hans var jeg i Live,”
„Hold Mund, 67) hold Mund, du lede Kvind, 68)
69
og pak dig ) nu strags i Hùlen ind.”
vi

Nu dækked de Hulen med Kvist
72

klagelig )

saa
62

)

55

) of the beech.

ales.

must ram bl c.

69

) elfs.

Hilda

70

) og med Grén,

7l

)

73

sig vinder; )

53

ä4
) at, in the hånest.
) surely, certainly.
) saloons, halls. 5T ) sweetly. 5e ) nighting60
) spectres, ghosts. liter, the inhabitant of the
56

barrow.

[confer Repp on ”Hogmanaye‘' in the Arehæologia Sco6i
° 2
63
ed.]
) fear not, optât (|).
) crosses G).
) the
64
65
posts of the door.
) beg (say) a prayer. optât.
) guard,
66
°7
6e
) slumber.
) moüth, y our tongue.
) you ugly (levvd)
69
70
71
woman !
) get you gone.
) twig, i. e. twigs.
) branch,
72
) mournfully. 73 ) winds, tyrings herself.
bough.
tica.

9

*

I
POETICAL EXTRACTS.

132

Hjærte er haardt som Stén,
Kvinder.
fast ) Kæmperne græde som
15
i
vilden
saa
Sky
Hvi gjalder, )
höjt
den Ludurblæst 76 ) og Vaabengny?
Faderens

men

14

Hvi bæve de Grane

77

i Lunden?

)

du

Ak, hjælpe dig Gud,

Konning bold!
78
Fjendens Vold, )

dit Guld og dit Sölv er i
79
Din Borg Konning Alkor har vunden; )
81
)
er saar, 80 ) Dine Svende
Dine

död’

er

Kæmper

:

han 82) sparer ej Barnet i Moderens Skod,
83
for Du ham for Nidding udskældte. )

Prinds Rerik i
han

söger

selv

Höjenloft

skön Hilda i hver

gaae,
Vraa, 84)

mon
en

han vader i Blod til sit Bælte.
Hit:
Da mælte Kong Valdemar gram i

Rerik har vundet sit Spil endnu;
skön Hilda han aldrig skal finde.”

„ej

Han axler

85

)

saa

brat sit

Purpurskind, 86 )

87
Brynje ) mon binde;
89
han rider sin Ganger s®) ad Borgeled )
!
min
„hil være dig Alkor, Fostbroderen
vel var det, jeg hér dig kan finde,

behænde sin

ind

:

91
ville vi slikke 90) hinandens Blod.” )
93
Da liiig 92) han med baade ) Hænder;
i
brast
men Sværdet
Stykker to;

nu

■'4) although, a Sved.
pet-sound Ltidnr, or
)
ed,

a

an

men.
84
87

91

)

Lu’r

horn

old
81

) he, the enemy, viz.
85
) throws on

corner.

friendship ( Foslbriidrelag ).
begge.

name

7r

*9

of

a

trum-

sort af

78

) power.

80

)\vound-

8I

the

80

) purplecloak.
90
) lick.
) the gate, poet. for Port,
his

custom in
0 2

) the pines.
won (p. 48).

) the

) young
partie, saaret.
83
abusedst.
Alkor.
calledst,
)
King

adj. usually expressed by

88

76

) sounds.
is the

Lu,

or

) charger.
) cuirass.
) alludes to the ancient

for

even

or

75

trumpet used in war.
Germanism or archaism for vundet,

antique
79

idiom for skönl,

shoulder.

swearing

one

) struck (-J p. 47).

another intimate
93

) both, poet.

12

TPOETICAL

liam

Aikor fra Sadelen render.

„Nu ligger

du alt paa din

95
paa blöden ) Jord
nu var det for mig

133

EXTRACTS.

9

‘)

Bag

behænde, 96 )
97
en
föje ) Sag,

dit

uselig Liv at ende,
aldrig jeg dræber 98 ) Fostbroder min,
fast du mig en Nidding mon kalde;
Men

min Sön du fæste skön Datter

din,
100

dig Borgen med alle. )
Men Valdemar drog sin hvasse Kniv :
„da agter jeg ikke at spare dit Liv.”
Han havde *) da vejet 2 ) Kong Alkor brat,
jeg vil det sige for Sande;
4
3
men Tagstenen
) ned fra Taarnet drat, )
6
5
hans
Pande.
)
og Valdemar slog ) paa
Da flygted 7 ) Kong Valdemars Svende ffis, 8 )
9
men ingen af dem saae Dagens Ljiis,
)
saa

frier

99

)) jeg

10
vidste, hvor Hilda mon blive. )
„Hvor est du, Prins Rerik! hvor est du,

som

min Sön?

haver du skön Hilda funden?

Kong

Valdemar haver alt

og vi have

Sejeren

fangen

11

)

sin Lon ;

vunden.”

uselig Svend!
Hjærtens Ven.
Jeg
med
Lampe, jeg sögte med Bilis,
Jeg sögte
det var saa öde 14 ) i Valdemars Hiis,
15
jeg ingensteds min Fæstemô ) saae
hendes
Tærner
smaa.
og ingensteds
arme
Gud hjælpe mig
uselig Svend!
jeg haver forloret min Hjærtens Ven.
„Gud hjælpe mig
haver forlöret

9 4

)

96

)

J

runs, throws.

flnelv.

97

S5

13

arme

)

min

13

)

) the sofî, a poet. form for blöd or den blöde.
98
) shall kill. ") deliver. I0 °) altogether.

) small.

2
3
) killed, poet.
) would, should have.
) the tile, a tile.
6
5
7
8
hit.
) dropt.
)
) forehead.
) fled.
) readily, precipitately.
9
) light, poet. for Lys. 10 ) did stay. 71 ) poet. for faaet, got.
13
12
) lost,
) flambeau, torch. 14 ) waste, emdty, 1 s ) betrothed maid.

!

/

134

POET1CA L

EXTRACTS.

ej saa, kær Sonnen min!
jeg dig bringer til Hænde;
jeg lader nedbryde hver Stok og Stén,
10
jeg lader det Tavlegulv ) vende.”
Dé sögte i Dage, de sögte i fem,
men Hilda de fandt ej i alle dem.
<(

Du sorge

Din Mo

Da kasted de Svende Fakler og Blùs
i Höjenloft med stor Gammen.
17
gyldne Flöje ) sank néd i Griis,
i vilden Sky brasked 18 ) Flammen.
Saa brændte de Valdemars stolte Borg;
men Rerik havde stor Hjærtesorg.
IIvad have I gjort? Ak, hjælp mig Krist!
den Lue saa sörgelig brager;
min Fæstemô have I brændt forvist. 19 )
20
21
hör, hör, hvor det ynkelig ) klager!” )
Da blev Kong Rerik saa vild i Hii;
i Ilden da vilde han springe.
Det var stor Jammer, det var stor Gru 22 )
at see, hvor ham Sorgen mon tvinge.
Hans Svende ham bandt med Silkesnor, 23 )

De

(l

de bandt ham de Hænder hvide.

Dage og Nætter han mælte ej Ord,
hans Fader til megen Kvide. 24 )
Den syvende Morgen, da S61 opstod,
Sex

gik
han

Rerik ind for sin Fader
var saa

vee 25

)

tilmode

god
:

give mig Kaabe, I give mig Stav !
ganger jeg til den hellige Grav,
alt for mine Synder at böde.” 20 )
Den gamle Konning da blev saa mod, 27 )
han græd saa bitter en Taare:
(i

I

saa

16

) clieckercd floor. [or tesselated pavelment.

cocks.

fully.
row.

ed.]

1T

) weather-

20
)
) surely.
) bragged, showed itself, arose.
24
23
22
21
J anguish,
) silkeord.
) horror.
) lameuts.
2T
26
25
) repent.
) weary, sorry.
) woeful.

I8

I9

wo-

sor-

VOETICAL

EXTRACTS.

135

28

) mig en Sön saa god,
29
nu lægger du mig paa Baare.
)
Hvad hjælper mig Sölv og rôde Guld?
hvad hjælper mig Lande og Borge?
„Du altid

en

varst

bårnlos Fader i sorten Muld

jeg ganger med bitre Sorge.
Bliv hér, min Sön ! udi Rysaland,
her trives

saa

favre

Kvinder;

selv rider

jeg ud, jeg siger for Sand,
den vænnesté Mö jeg dig vinder.”
„Ak Fader! her er ingen Gammen mér,
paa Jorden er mörkt kun og öde,
I Himmelens Rige, hvor Hilda hun ér,
der finder jeg Rö for min Kvidé.”
Da tog Prins Rerik den Stav i Haand,
han gik saa brat for Sorgen.
Da sukked Kong Alkor og opgav sin Aand,
der var stor Jammer paa Borgen,
Tre Aar han vanked 31 ) vide om Land,
32
og fandt hverken Ro eller Lise; )
da saae han i Drömme en gammel Mand,
han ligned Kong Alkor tilvisse.
„Vend ôm, vend om, du Ridder bold !
hvi spilder 33 ) du Tiden saa ilde?
dit Rige er i dine Svendes Vold,
de raade, 34 ) alt som de ville.
Din Fader er lagt i sorten Muld;
men Hilda hun er dig tro og hùld.
Vend om, vend om saa skyndelig,
35
men mærk
) det Ord, jeg siger dig:

2B

) poet. for tar. 29 ) the bier. 3 thrive, grow up. 31 ) strayed,
32
) relief, comfort. 33 ) losest. 34 ) rule, act. 35 ) at-

rambled.

136

EXTRACTS.

EOETICAE

Jomfru, du möder paa Höjenlofts Bro, 36 )
hende skal du kaare 37 ) og give din Tro,
men Hilda skal komme fra Graven brat,
den

sove

og

„Saa
Då

södt i din Arm hver Nat.”

saa

Hilda

er

död !” raabte Rerik

brat,

han i den mörke Nat.

vaagnede

Grév Hildebrand sidder paa Alkors
der er stor Fryd og Gammen :

„Prins

Rerik

„nu ville vi

er

död af

glædes

hin klare

Mjöden
Borgeled 39)

Ved

Hjærtens Sorg,

tilsammen.

„I Dag, stolt Målfred!
„nu

vort

33
Bryllup )

baade

skal staa

spares maa.”

ej

hviler

en

Pillegrim sig,

vel indsvöbt 40) udi sin Hætte;
han

Borg,

41

)

og uselig,
Foden fra Jorden kan lette.

er

knap
„Kom ind,

gammel

kom ind du

Pillegrimsmand !

42
„nu skalt ) du den Mjöd med os drikke!
43
„Grev Hildebrand fæster sin Liljevand, )
44
„paa Gammen her skorter det ikke.” )
Men Malfred ham möder paa Höjelofts
hun er saa blég om Kinde;

da Gubbens 45 ) Ord

sig

til Minde lian

Bro,

drog; 46 )

han her sin Brud skulde finde.
I

saa vee

her stande

her stande

36

)

an

loft,

or

træder den

Pillegrim ind,
tilmode, 47 )
Kong Alkors gæve Mænd,
de Staldbrodre gode;

Höjensal

han blev

old and obscure
upper story,
39

expression,

perhaps

liter,

the siairs

the
are

bridge

meant.

of the high
3T

) choose.
40

) wrapt
)
expression
) wedding.
42
41
a coarse Germanism
for
cowl.
skal,
shalt,
)
by
)
poet.
up.
43
) composed of Uly & wand, otherthey Write soraetimes skalst.
for a maiden. 44 )there
old
Vaand
an
circumlocution
wise
(p. 25),
38

js

no

lach.

Iiis mind.

45

an

for Porten, the gate.

old

) the old

rnan’s.

4e

) he recollected.

47

)woefulin

POETICAL

137

EXTRACTS.

i

Hôjsædet 48 ) sidder Grev Hildebrand prnd,
hvor Alkor för plejed at hvile;
ved Siden sidder hans unge Briid,
saa sörgelig monne hun smile.
Den Pillegrim ydmyg til Gruen 49 mon
)
gaa,
i Krogen 50 ) ved Asken han monne staa.
Det Horn 51 ) gik rundt med Ö1
og med Mjöd,
de Kæmper det drabelig 52 ) tomte ; 53
)
da

tog den Greve Guldkronen riid,

alt

sig en Konning det sömte : 54 )
fylde mig Hornet til överste Rand,

som

I
det

Det

til Prins Reriks Minde.

er
er

tre

den

hellige
da sagde

M

Aar,

)

han

drog ud af Land,
tinde,
„Hildebrand, Frænde kær

Grav at
han

:

!

„hvis inden den tredie Sommer
„I finde mig ej i Höjeloft her,
„der aldrig tilbage jeg kommer,
„da ligger jeg blég i sorten Muld:
„men 1 skal Guldkronen bære.
„1 raade da for mit Solv og mit Guld
„og for mine

Kæmper

„Ti sværger mig

kære.

nu, I Alkors Mænd !

„medens Mjödehornet jeg drikker”
Da faldt Guldkronen paa Jorden hen,

—

—

den brast vel i tusinde
Fra Gruen

de

rejste
Krykker 56 ) han

Stykker.
Pillegrim sig,
kasted 5T ) saa skyndelig,
den

han kasted den Kaabe og Hætte
graa:
da stod han saa faver i
Brynje blaa.

„Her

seer

du Prins

Rerik,

Men Hildebrand blev baade

som

bleg

du
og

siger
röd;

49
) the hearth. i0 ) the corner.
S3
54
) bravely.
) eniptied.
) became,
16
5T
) crutches.
) threvv, viz. mcay.

,e

)

the throne.

horn.

52

död!”

5

*) drinking) vi*, since.

i5

138
han

EXTRACTS.

POETICAL

greb

saa

brat til sit brede

Sværd,

58

) en sörgelig Brudefærd.
Men Rerik ham Sværdet af Haanden slog,

han vontes

59
og dybt sit Glavind ) i Hjærtet ham
Rerik
nu
Prins
op i Höjeloft Irén:

sværger af eder at være min Mand?”
de alle, de svore som én,

„hvo
da

60
jog. )

svore

Könning de Rerik da kaared paa Stand.
„I stander, stolt Malfred! saa blég og ræd,
„I frygte 61 ) ej for min Vrede;
C2
63
„jeg gjör ej værgelos ) Mö Fortræd, )
04
„til Mildhed jeg flugs ) er rede.
„I give mig eders snehvide Haand,
65
„I mig eders Tro tilsige, )
„Skön Hilda er död den Liljevaand,
„vi ere hinanden vel lige.”
„Naar Hilda ej lever paa grönnen Jord,
„og Hildebrand hviler paa Baare,
„saa giver jeg eder min Haand og mit Ord;
„jeg gilied ej Hildebrand saare.”
Da blev der i Borgen et Vaabengny, 66 )
de Fryderaab 67 ) stege til höjen Sky.
til

I al den Stund skön Hilda hun sad
i Skovens den mörke Hule
som

Mos og Gren monne skjule.
for sandt, han var ej glad.

Jeg siger
Hun

saae

de

ej Dagens

Stjerner

og ej
der altid

var

klare

mörkt i det

skönt Solen paa Himlen

58

) expected,

60

) thrusted.

vexation.
a

sign of

64

a
61

Ljiis

smaa;

Norwegian

Jættehüs,

mon

staa.

expression for væntede sig,
62
) defenceless.

do not fear ! optât.

)
) immediately.

consent and

joy.

65
eT

)

do

promise, optât.

) sliouts.

50
63
66

) glaive.
) trouble,

)

here

as

POETICAIi

139

EXTRACTS.

Paa

Taget der var vel et Röghul G8 ) gjört,
men listelig 69 ) skjult 70 ) med en
Helle, 71 )
som tög hende
Ljusets Straale bort,
hun kunde ej Dagene tælle. 72 )
„De Uger henrinde,
de Maaneder svinde:

de Ulve tude;
det

fryser
du,

saa

Hvor est

73

)

haardt i Skoven derude.

kær Fader?

vidste

Ak,

du, hvad jeg
„De Uger henrinde.,

de Maaneder svinde

maa

lide!”

:

i

grönne Lunde 74)
hôjt galer Gögen ved Midsommers Stunde.
Hvor est du min Rerik?

Ak, vidste du, hvad jeg maa lide !”
Saa gik et Aar, saa gik vel tre
I

Sorg og megen Kvide,
da döde hendes Tærner
de Tærner döde af

de lævnede

7ä

)

tre,

Hungers Nöd,

hende den sidste Bid

Skön Hilda sad ved de kolde Lig,
hun kunde for Sorrig ej græde :

„Ak

77

76

)

Brod.

)

Herre Gud Fader i

„ak skjenk dem

din

Himmerig!
evige Glæde!”

Hungeren hende saa saare drév,
glemte at sukke og bede; 79 )
liden Hund hun sonderrév,

Men

hun
sin

den vilde hun
Liden

den slikkede

6e

) aperture

concealed.
T3

)

howl.

78

)

praj'*

79

stege ) og æde.
Issegrim 80) var hendes sidste Ven,

Haanden,

for the smoke.

der dræbte den.

69

) cunningly, artificially. 7 °) hid
72
flat stone [a slate].
)
) count 1 P- 45
74
75
76
77
left.
) groves.
)
) morsel.
) corpses
79
) roast, broil. 80 ) the dog’s name.
71

a

140
81

En sulten
han tuded
den

den

EXTRACTS.

POETICAL

) Ulv ved Röghullet gik,
fælt og saa ilde;

saa

Liglugt 82 ) han i Næsen fik,
Bråd 83 ) han smage 84 ) vilde.

Han snused og kradsede med stor
og kasted de Stene behænde;
han grov fra
da havde det

Flid,

han vilde
men

87

)

)

Morgen til Midnats Tid,
Arbejde Ende.

Han ned til skön Hilda i Hulen drat ;

det Mode

8a

ham

fus

saa

Hilda ham

ej
89

behage,

mon

88

86

)

)

) tilbage;
i Halen

griber

af Hulen han hende

maa

90

) fat,

drage

selv til megen Umage. 01 )
Til Skoven lakked den Ulv afsted,

sig

det bedste han kunde
men

Hilda laae

saa

sine Hænder vred

95

93

syg og mat,

) og

Mod Himlen hun rakte
saa

venlig

de

i mörken

)

Stjerner

96

94

92

)

Nat,

)

bitterlig græd.
) de Hænder smaa,

ned til hende

saae.

Ak Herre Gud Fader i
a

Himmerig!
usle forbarme dig! 97 )
ud af Hulens Nöd, 9S )
nu fra Hungerens Död!”
og slumred saa södelig ind.

mig
hjalp mig
du frelse mig
Saa bad hun,
Du

over

Du

Hun

sov

bevogted

saa

—

trygt foruden Fare,

af Himmelens

Engleskare, ")

alt i det klare Maaneskin.

83
) meat, properly
) smelt of the corpses.
85
used
both
snout
and claws very
taste.
)
)
87
88
86
) meeting.
) piease, like.
) feli, tumbled.
diligently.
90
89
92
91
) pains, trouble.
) fain,
J the tail,
) trotted olf.
96
93
94
) wrung, 96 ) stretched
) weary.
J as fast as he could.
97
98
) have pity, mercy upon ! optât.
p, 42).
) distress.
") host of angels.

SI

) hungry.

roasted

meat.

®2

® 4

*

EXTRACTS.

POETICAL

Den næste

Morgen,

da det blev

vaagnede op med stor Behag.
Den blide *) Sol i Purpurglands ä )
hun

141

Dag,
100

)

steg frem bag Skovens grönne Krands.
I klaren Luft den Lærke sang,
3
og kvidred ) Gud Fader sin Morgensang.

«Ak Herre Gud Fader

i

Himmerig!

hvor her paa Jorden er lystelig!”
Saa tænkte hun paa sin Fader grum 4 )
og Rerik sin Hjærtens kære.

..Hvor mon paa Jorden de vanke om?
Ak, mon i Live de ere?
Ak, kjendte jeg nu kun Sti og Vej,
og var jeg ej saa mat!
men fjærn og nær jeg öjner ej
et Spor & ) i vilden Krat.” 6 )
Da hörte bun en venlig Lyd
af

Jægers ') Hörn ;
hendes Hjærte slog saa höjt af Fryd,
hun ilte gjennem Krat og Törn;
da glemte hun al sin Hjærtesorg.
Det var ung Hagbart fra Reriks Borg.
«Du Ungersvend, forbarme Dig!
Jeg er en fattig Mö,
jeg har i Skoven forvildet mig, 8)
og maa af Hunger dö.
Jeg vanked om den ganske Nat,
jeg er saa syg, jeg er saa mat.”
«Ej est du nogen ringe Kvind,
«du favre Blomme 9 ) du Liljevand!”
10
Saa satte han hende
paa Gangeren ) sin,
som

en

—

og réd derfra paa Stand.
10
3

°) delight, pleasurc.

) warjiled.

my

1

)

2
) chearl'ul bright.
) purpie splcndor.
6
T
) trace, path.
) copse, briars.
) a
way. ®) poet. for Blomst, flower. 10 ) steed.

) cruel.

8
) lost
) immediately.

hunter’s.
11

4

11

5

142

POETICAR

alt

Og

extracts.

de red af Skoven

ud,
mangehaande:
„hvor agted du dig, skön Jomfru prud !
„medens du kom i slig Yaandc?” > 2)
„Jeg vilde til Valdemars gyldne Borg
13
„at tjene som Tærne i Stegerset ) der.”
„Vilde du til Valdemars gyldne Borg,
„da var du vist fremmed i Landet her.
„Kong Valdemar hviler i sorten Jord,
„hans Borg er tom og öde,
„Kong Alkor den vandt med Manddom 14 ) stor,
de talte

som

saa

„men selver

15

) af Sorrig han döde ;
„ti Valdemars Datter, den vænneste Mö,
„der fandtes saa vide paa Jordens Ö,
16
„blev kvalt ) i Borgens Flammer;
1T
„det var stor Ynk ) og Jammer.
19
„Prins Rerik, hendes Fæstemand, )
vee
blev
saa
tilmode;
„han

drog han
„for Synderne
„saa

bort til Jorsalaland 19 )
sine at böde.

„Der monne han Trost og Husvalelse
„alt for sin bitre Sorg;
„i Morgen han lader sit Bryllup staa
Malfred paa sin

20

) faa

Borg.”
blegnede ) Hilda, og daanede 22) brat.
23
„Hvad fattes dig, ) væne Mö?”
„Mig fattes slet intet, jeg er kun saa mat,
24
„ret ) som jeg skulde dö.”
25
„Nu frisk tilmode ! ) lad fare din Sorg !
„Nu ride vi flugs til Reriks Borg;
„med

12

)

inan.
2I

)
25
)

13

distress.

mase.

for selv.
19

—

21

Da

)

turned

an

) kitchen.
16

old

naine

paie (]),

ehe er up.

I4

) valour.

) suffocated (J- p, 42).
22

of Palestine.

20

) fainted (J).

23

15
lT

) the oid nom. sing,
) pity. 18 ) betrothed

) comfort and consolation.
) what ails thee. 24 )jusf.

POETICAL

143

EXTRACTS.

„der har jeg to Söstre kære,
„hos Malfred tjene de Tærner smaa,
„de vil dig undfange 26 ) med Ære.” 27)
„0! hvis jeg lios Malfred tjene maa!
„Jeg kan baade sy og somme,
„dertil jeg kan Guldharpen slaa
„alt som sig en Tærne mon somme.”
Nu ride de af Borgeled ind,
der moder hun Yen og Frænde;
da svöber hun sit Hoved i Skind, 2S )
at ingen maa hende kjende.
Ind traadte ung Hagbart for Malfred at staa :
„hvor mon det med eder, stolt Malfred! gaa?”
„I Nat 29 ) jeg har födt 30) dig saa faver en Son,
„dine Söstre ham svöbte, 31 ) og fostre i Lön, 32)
„mig arme 33 ) til Angest og Kvide.
„I Morgen mit Bryllup med Rerik skal staa,
„jeg kan det ej længer forhale. 34 )
„Krist give i sorten Muld jeg laa!
„Den Vej til Kirken at ride er lang,
„og lang at höre den Messesang;
„Gud hjælpe mig arme Kvinde!”
Da svarede Hagbart: „kær Malfred min!'
35
Jeg veed vel Raad ) at finde.
36
stander
en Mö saa
fin,
„I Borgegaard )
hun
monne
hede; 37 )
„liden Gunver
„jeg fandt i Skoven den Liljevand.
„For eder Hl Kirke hun ride kan,
—

„naar hende derom I mon bede.
„Hun svöbe sig vel i Guldkaaben

„hun skjule

„og tale kun lidt med Fæstemand
26

27

ind,

sit Hoved i hviden Lin,

28

din,
29

) honorably.
) last
)
eloak, mantie.
)
32
30
31
) born, brought fortil.
) swaddled.
) secretly.
night.
36
34
33
) retard. 35 ) counsel, advice, help.
) an
) poor, wretched.
37
oid expression for courtyard.
) is called, is her name.
receive.

furred

/
144
alt

4i

POETLCAL

for

som

mærker

(l

saa

<(

Og,

(i

da skifte

tl

(l

<(

Brüd

en
39

EXTRACTS.

sig

mon

) Kong’ Rerik

det ikke.

fra Kirke de komme

naar

40

I

skikke, 38 )

hjem,

og du træde frem.
Ved Bordet du sidde saa hovisk en Brud,

)

Klæder,

og bære med Ære Guldkronen prud;
41
43
men, naar det lakker ad ) Sengetide, )
kan Gunver

ved

Kongens Side.”
Hör du, liden Gunver! jeg siger dig,
om du est tro og uden Svig, 43 )
jeg giver dig Kaabe af Skarlagen röd,
44
jeg giver dig Kjortel af Silke blöd; )
45
af
alt
Hælften
mit
)
Guld,
jeg giver dig
l(

sove

—

—

—

((

om

du vil

være

mig

tro og huld.”

Nu skinner Solen paa

4e

)

Höjelofts Giar, 47 )

den

Söndagsmorgen var.
Purpurskind,
og gange for stolten Kong Rerik ind.
Men Rerik busker 48 ) saa mangt tilbage,
han tænker paa Hilda og fordums Dage.
Nu skinner Solen i Jomfrubur,

Saa

bellig

De Riddere axle det

der stande de Tærner med

Ære,

de fæste paa Hilda Guldkronen pur,
saa stoltelig mon hun den bære.

,,Liden Gunver, liden Gunver, du robe mig ej
Du mæle ej Ord paa den Kirkevej !”
Men Hilda bun sukker 49 ) saa saare i Lön,

!

((

saa ofte paa Alkors Sön.
Nu rider skön Hilda paa Gangeren graa,
Kong Rerik alt ved hendes Side;

hun tænker

da synge i Skoven de Fugle smaa,
det var nu ved Midsommers Tide.
38

)

to,

it becomes.
4a

) bedtime.
4r

40

) observes.
43

) an old
) rcmembers, thinks.

fectionate.
48

39

) fraud.
form for
49

44

) exchange.
45
) soft.
)

Glas, i.

) sighs.

e,

41

one

Windows.

) approaches
4S
half.
) af-

[Icel, gier,]

145

POETICAL EXTBACTS.

„Ak,” sukkede Hilda, „den Dag-

var

skön,

„da Valdemars Datter og Alkors Sön
„de gave hinanden deres Tro udi Lön!”
„Hvi sukker I saa, liden Malfred fin?”

—

—

talede kun til

„Jeg

Nu ride de atter

min.”

Gangeren
en

Stund

50

) tilsammen:

er ond og
„Den Vej,
lang,
„vi ville den korte med Spög og Gammen,
„vi ville os kvæde en lystig Sang.”
„Tre Aar jeg i Jordens Hule sad,
„alle lystige Viser jeg forgad ! 51 )
„min liden Hund jeg stegte og aad,

stolt Malfred!

—

„graa Ulven haver jeg reden.”
„Hvad siger I dér, skön Jomfru fin?”

„Jeg

talede kun til

Gangeren

min.”

Ved
nu

da

Vejen stod Valdemars gyldne Borg,
52
var der kun Stene
og Gruus ) tilbage;
skön
Hilda saa brat af Sorg,
blegned

hun tænkte paa fordums favre

Dage.

„Her hoppe Duer,
hvor för har danset Fruer;
her rode 53 ) Svin,
hvor

Kæmper för drak Mjöd og Vin.”
„Hvad kvæder I nu, liden Fæstemô fin?”
„Jeg talede kun til Gangeren min.”
Ved Vejen stande de
gamle Linde;
Kong Rerik rider forbi saa tyst; 61 )
dog sukked han dybt, 55) og droges til Minde
i Ungdoms
Dage sin Elskovs Lyst.
Men Hilda griber de Tommer 56
) smaa,
den Ganger i Lindenes
Skygge mon staa.
—

50

)

a

while.

51

glemmer, glemte.,
6e
) the reins, i.

) forgot.
52

e.

au

) rultbish,

•———

old
53

impf,
)

of

root,

forgaller, now we say
55
) silently.
) heavy,

ä4

Tiijle, kridte.
10

)
SwBr

146

POETICAIi BXTRACTS.

Du Lind

„Her stander

fin;

baade faver og

Skygge

din

din Krone

kolig og skön,
frisk og grön;
kvidre endnu saa glade

er
er

éndnu

endnu

Smaafuglene
og lege imellem

saa

Blade,
Skygge

de tætte

fordum da i din

som

vi

saa

sloge Guldharpen trygge,

som

gav

fordum da Alkors Sön
Hilda sin Tro i Lön.”

Det blev

Kong

Rerik

saa

underlig ved,

57
Taare ham randt paa Kinden ) ned :
I saa?”
„Stolt Malfred, stolt Malfred, Ih i kvæder
kvad kun, fordi min Hest vilde staa.”

en

„Jeg

Nu
der

er

stige

Hugs derhos,
5S
höjen Ros, )
folge den Könning prüd,
folge den unge Brud.

den Kirke

de néd af

tolv Riddere

tolv Tærner
De Munke dem möde i Kirkedör

59
med Bon og Sang, som det sig bör. )
60
Nu staa de for Alteret sömmelig. )
med
nu
Jomfru ! I skifte
mig.”
Ring

„Skön

Da fik han den

samme

Ring tilbage,

som Hilda han gav i fordums Dage
alt under de gamle Linde;
den Ring han sig kunde vel minde.

„Stolt Malfred! I sige mig uden Svig,
„hvor fik I den Ring, som I gav mig?”
„Min Tærne den fandt mellem Stene og
„i Asken af Valdemars gyldne Hus.”
61
„Gud hjælpe mig arme, uselig Svend ! )
Da Hilda döde, da bar hun den.
Tag Ringen tilbage, min Fæstemo kære!
jeg kan den ret aldrig paa Fingeren bære;
—

5T

) the clieek.

ed.]

69

) ought

5S

) horse, poet. |the Icel.

to be.

60

) becomingly,

form. is
61

Grus

hross,

or

) swain, youth.

ross,

POETICAL

147

EXTRACTS.

tag Ringen tilbage, kær Malfred fin!

Fingeren din!”
Nu monne de hjem til Borgen ride.
Den Brudgom han var saa sorrigfuld;
men Hilda har glemt al Sorg og Kvide,
aldrig

og

den komme af

hende tro og huld.
De Kæmper sidde ved bréden

for Rerik

er

de drikke baade Ö1 og
de vexle

et

mangt

saa

Bord,
Mjöd
skjemtsomt Ord;

Mjödcn den smager saa söd.
6a
Kong Rerik sidder saa tankefuld )
ti

alt ved stolt Malfreds Side;
hun bærer saa höjt den Krone af

Guld,

63
ung Hagbart vel lide. )
64
Men Hilda i Stégerset driid ) mon gaa
65
alt med de Kokketærner ) smaa.

det

maa

Kong Rerik
I sige mig
(

taler til Bruden sin:
nu, stolt Malfred fin!

hvi sukket I, da ved Middags Tide
vi gjennem mörken Skov mon ride ?”

jeg plat 66 ) forgjet,
67
det.”
jeg bad min Tærne at gjemme )
til
Malfred
ganger
sig.
Stolt
Stegerset
68
du
haver
nu
Liden Gunver!
sveget ) mig!
ved
da
hvi sukked du,
Middags Tide
du gjennem Skoven med Kongen mon ride?”
fin !
„Jeg har dig ei sveget, min Frue
69
min.”
jeg snakkede ) kun til Gangeren
((

Hvi

jeg sukked,

det haver

<4

Kong Rerik taler til ungen Briid;
!
“I sige mig nu, stolt Malfred prud
Gammen
for
da
hvad sagde I,
Spög og
vi vilde kvæde

62) pensive.

63

)

en

it is

Vise
a

70

) tilsammen ?”

delight

for him.

6

4j

sac| 5

p 0 et.

[Icel.

ed.]
weeping.
6e
6T
66
remember.
66
)
betrayed.
) keep,
) entirely.
) cookmaids.
T0
69
) lay.
) ehattered,

hriilin

used

of

a

countenance

swollen

from

10

148

POETICAL BXTRACTS.

„Hvad jeg sagde, det haver jeg plat forgjet,
jeg bad min Tærne at gjemme det.”
Skön Malfred til Stegerset ganger sig.
„Liden Gunver; nu har du dog sveget mig;
I vilde kvæde

Yise tilsammen?”

en

ei

sveget, min Frue
„Jeg har dig
jeg talede kun til Gangeren min.”
Rerik han sidder

Kong
i Hü

saa

vred han

saa

fin!

tankefuld,

var:

„jeg seer nok, skjön Malfred! I er mig ej huld,
71
jeg faaer kun saa korte Svar. )
I drages det sikkert til Minde
Nu sig mig
hvad var det 1 kvad ved de gamle Linde?”
„Hvad jeg kvad det haver jeg plat forgjet,
jeg bad min Tærne at gjemme det,”
Stolt Malfred ganger i Stegerset ind :
72
„Du har dog bedraget ) mig, listige Kvind!
hvad var det, du kvad ved de gamle Linde!”
„Jeg har ei bedraget dig, Malfred fin !
jeg talede kun til Gangeren min;
alt, hvad jeg kvad ved de gamle Linde,
det kvad jeg kun til min Ganger graa,
fordi han ej vilde ad Veje.n gaa.”
Kong Rerik han sidder saa vréd i Hii :
„stolt Malfred, stolt Malfred ! I vise mig nu
den Ring, jeg eder i Kirken gav.”
„Den Ring, 1 mig i Kirken gav,
den gav jeg til min Tærne;
jeg bærer de Ringe ej gjerne.”
„Du husker jeg bad dig, stolt Malfred fin!
den aldrig at lægge af Fingeren din.”
Stolt Malfred hun ganger i Stegerset néd,
—

—

—

da

T1

)

var

answers

hun i Hu

(i).

TI

saa

vréd;

) deceived.

149

POETICAL EXTRACTS.

hör,

„o g

jeg
giv

liden Gurtver!

om

föje Stund 73 )

straffe skal dine lumske Fund; 74 )
hid den Ring, dig Rerik
gav !”

„Den Ring mig Rerik
den

svor

jeg

i Kirken gav,

at bære til min

den kommer ret

aldrig

af

Grav,
Fingeren min,

den kan

jeg ej give dig, Malfred fin!”
„Giv Ringen hid, du lede 75) Kvind !
eller jeg dig kaster i Ormegaard 76 ) ind;

Kong

Rerik vil

see

den

nu

paa Stand.”

„Den Ring ret aldrig, stolt Malfred! du faar,
om du mig end 77 ) kaster i
Ormegaard.
Men vil
da

Kong

Rerik den

see

paa

Stand,

du

skjule
mig under Kaaben din,
vise
ham Ringen paa Fingeren min!”
og
Stolt Malfred hun var vel i Hu saa vred,
dog vendte hun Talen saa fage:
„jeg giver dig, Gunver, Guldkæden bred,
om du
mig ej vil bedrage.”
Nu svöbte de sig i Kaaben fin,
og ginge saa listig i Höjeloft ind
dem begge til megen Umage.
Liden Hilda fremrakte sin Haand

saa

hvid

alt under den Kaabe behænde.

„Stolt
at

Malfred! I

stige

kun

78

)

nærmere

hid,

79

Ringen jeg rigtig ) maa kjende!”
Da griber Kong Rerik om Haanden fat,

80
og kaster til Side ) den Kaabe saa brat;
der stander stolt Malfred bleg og röd,
af skogrende 81 ) Latter 82 ) den Höjsal gjenlöd;

Rerik han blev

men

T3

)

in

short time.

I4

saa

83

)

vel tilmode.

) thy insidious devices.

T5

) abominable.
) prison filled with venomous serpents.
) om end, although.
T9
78
) duly. 80 ) throws open. 81 ) chuckling. 82 ) laughter.
) but.
8S
resounded.
)
a

T6

rT

)

rOETICAIi EXTRACTS.

150

det

dig!”
baade,
og
det
tilvisse
er
Hilda!
dig?
ak,
„ak
85
84
est du ej et Gjenfærd, ) som skuffer ) mig,
86
da skalt du mig aldrig forlade.” )
87
Der blev stor Fryd i den Kongeborg; )
sin
Sorg;
ti Rerik han havde forvundet
men Malfred og Hagbart i Ormegaard
„Ak!”

raabtc han

slynged omkring

„ak

er

hende Armene

skulde lide for Falskhed

en

Straf

Hilda: „ak Konning
Bön vilde vide,

Da bad

skjön
mig en
da spare I Hagbarts unge Blod,
han frelste mig fra stor Kvide;
1

om

I spare og stolt Malfreds

hendes Falskhed
I
I

jo

til

hende til

give ung Hagbart
skjenke mig denne

Naade !”

Da svarede Rerik den

aldrig

en

Bon

jeg

Baade;

Viv,
88

)

Konning

„mit Hjærte, skjön Hilda!
ret

god!

Liv,

mig

var

haard.

saa

kan

er

bold:

i din

Vold,

89
nægte ) dig.

Himmerig!
jeg har funden,
Ungdoms
al
har jeg
Sorrig forvunden;
ville vi leve i Fryd og Gammen,
Graven os begge mon skjule.”

Gudfader skee Lov i
min
nu
nu

til

Mö

85

) deludes.

84

) spectre.

80

) deny, refuse.

86

) quit.

87

Amen!

) royal palace.

88

) grâce.

151

POËTICAL EXTKACTS,

TRYMSKVIDE ELLER HAMMERENS HENTELSE,
en

eddisk

Sang,

oversat i

ved denne

(Af

The

samme

Versemål

Originalens

Bogs

Forfatter.

Bog.)

purport of this very old song is, that the chicf
purloined Thor’s' mallet, the great palladium

Giant had

of

the

Loke is

Gods,

turns with the

dispatched

to discover

it, and
Thrym has it

account, that the Giant

re-

in-

deed in his

possession, but will by no means restore it,
unless the Goddess Freya will become his wife; the Ases
hoicever contrive to deceive him, Thor recovers his mallet,
and immediately destroys the Giant together with all the
Those
guests assembled for the supposed wedding
who wish a farther illustration af this song may consnlt
Prof. Finn Magnussen’s den ældre Edda, 2d vol. Copen,

—

,

hagen,

1822.

IBreb hieb ba

SSingtor
t;an bågnebe,

„hberfen

han fin jammer

„21é

ber
cg

„eller

atlerforfl foab:
„bit bu mig, øfret;a !
„Sjeberhnmmen 10 ) låne 11 )

the

god

a

name

national
8

:

jamren ranet!" 8 )

er

lange 3orben8 @ön 4 )
ont.

5

common

name.

) robbed.

set of

2

Thor,

mother of Thor.
is

)

®e gif til 8ret)a§
9
fagre ®årbe, )

5

og han bet Drb

)

Dg han bet Drb
allerfcrft fo ab :
„her bu tut, Sofe!
G
„tab mig big berette, )
„hbab ingen Oeb
)

7

t)o@ flg faonebe ; *)
©fægget t)«n rtyfleb 3 )
reb han cg fît Uår
lebte runbten

4

haa Sorben

ubi Rimten

wings.

9

)

jeg

„ont

min jammer

„obfpore 12 måtte?”
„Satte big ben bilbe jeg
„bar ben ettb af ©etb,

missed.

3

) shook.

4

) searched round about.
to

The

the

As

deities, like the
means

) houses, dwellings.

**) lend.

I2

here
10

the

the

earth

) tell.

r

)

6

Olympians,
god

was

Thor

a

sort

out.

of

himself.

) the feather-covering,

) trace, find

the

) The Ases

a

POBTICAL EXTRACTS.

152

„få ben ffttlbe bu,
„ffottt ben bar af ®ulb.

Slöj ba Sofe,
Sjeberbamntett fufle,

Sofe,
Sjebcrbammett fufle,

inbtil ban font uben

Slöj

ba

Søtnerneé Sanb,
ban font inben

inbtiï ban font uben

og

Qlferiteé ©tab,

QlfertteS

og

ban fom inben

Søtnerneé Sanb.

ïrfmt fab baa •êôjctt,
iîuêferneê Stoffe,
13
gfylbne -fjalébåttb )
,5
u
åpunbene ) I;an ftetteb, )
16
felb ban og jaionebe )
©abelbçretê 17) 2J?att.
„>5bor går bet Qlfer?
„Ijbor går bet QUfer?

„f)bi font bu ene
„til Søtnerneé Sattb?”
„3Ibe går bet Qlfer,
„ilbe går bet Qllfer,
„bar bu iffe SorribeS
lg
„jammer bortgjemt ? )

„SorribeS jammer
„ttaber jeg bortgjemt,
„åtte Mile
„unber Sorben;
„ingen ff al få ben
„atter tilbage,
„uben l;an forer mig

„Srelta

til ©rub !’’

©tab.

$bøt‘

Siebte baut ber
mibt i

©taben,

ban bet £)rt)
allerforfi foab:
„Sif bu noget
19
„for bin Sftöje? )
„ftg mig i Suften
„en lang ©eretning ;
„tit for ben ftbbenbc
20
„©agnet foroilbeé, )
og

liggenbe
>§ob. ai)
4
„SQoget* ) fif jeg
„for min 9Roje :
„îttëferneê Sbrjte
„$rbm bat bin jammer;
„ittgett ffal få beti
„atter tilbage,

„og ben

„Iboer

en

„uben batt fører barn
til ©rub!

„greba
3)e

greba
og

gif

ttteb

at

tale,

l;an

allerforft

fagre

bet Drb

foab

:

l6

) evened,
)braided.
) for the dogs, Dative.
is
a
17
horse.
aside,
)
euphethe
i.
e.
put
the
saddle-animnl
)
the trouble
J9
mism for robbed.
) did you get (gain) any thing by
21
20
) a (goodj deal.
have taken.
) the tale is troubled.
1B

) collars (y).

you
22

) something.

l4

15

153

POBTICAL FXTRACTS.

,,©inb om big, §ret;a !
„©rubelinet 23 )
24
,,age ) ffal bi fammen

„til SøtnerneS

Snnb!”

©reb bleö ba
og

„Älingrenbe Øløgler
„fn^tte bi til ©æltet,
„labe om tjanb ålnæ
„ålbinbeflæber falbe,
„men faa ©r^jlet

Srefm,

fntyfle fåre, 23)

„brebe 56belflene, 31 )

fiele Ølfa*falen
unber

tjenbe fïjaïô,
flore

brafl

33

„fire ) bi tjanë «êobeb!

og bet

Set fbab ba Sot

©riflnge -§al$bånb:
„Äalb mig ben tabefle 2C)

ben

Set fbab ba Sofe
SobøS

bel

berom

„ølégårb bebo,

©anbt be ba

tjbibefie Qtfe,

om

bar

og bet

flore

©rifinge >§alsbånb,
flingrenbe ©øgler

„©rubelinet,

Seltet,
l;nn® Jtnæ
ålbinbeflæber falbe,

) bridai

fnt;tteb

Nion for
name

attire.

lascivious,

hvor,

like

belonged,
with

lobe

be til

om

24

) drive, ride, 25 ) fumed terribly. 26 ) the
2T
) deliberate, 28 ) an obsolete exprèshvorledes, how. 29 ) foreseeing. 30 ) a gentile

wanton.

or

Ases,
31

Sor

©rubelinet,

forubbibenbe 29)

fom ©aner 30) alle:
„©inbe bi om Sot ba

most

me

35

) bu bin jammer
„l;enter big igjen.”
„uben

„bære t;an bet flore
„©riflnge -Salöbanb ;
® 3

Slrbing:

„Sot, meb flig Sale
„ti bu fun flille;
„fnart fïulle Søtner

tjur 28) be fïuUe ^ente
•jammeren for Sor.
Set îbab ba >§ejmbal
ben

:

„meb ©rubelinet.”

råbflå 27)
mægtige ©über,

be

tafre «Serre

„Ølferne fïulbe
„mig fïælbe for fej, 34)
„t;bi8 jeg lob mig binbe

„blanbt Jloinber alle,
„om jeg ager meb big
„til 3øtnerne8 Sanb!”
€trag@ bare Slfer
alle
Singe
og 9lfl;nier
alle få Sale:
monne

meb @æt 32 )

„funfligen

perhaps
32
)

) gems.

effeminaey.

ä5

a

Slavonian tribe,

coif.

) if

not,

3>

j

let

us

to

vvhich

adorn.

3

Hejmdal
*) reproaeh

POETICAL EXTR ACTS.

154

„ttof tjar jeg ©fatte,
„nof tjar jeg ©utttånt,

!p& ©rtjftet

men

Sdbetffene,
funfiigen met ©eet

trete

fireb

te

tjanø à?obeb.

Set ftat ta Sofe

£øboø Qlrbing:
„bift bit jeg met big,
„bære tin Seerne,

fïat bi fammen
„tit Søtnerneø Sant.”
„age

©tragø

Hebe

tegge

©uffe 86) trenne tjent,
37

fatte for ©fagterne, )
ffutte tjurtig tete:
mangen Jtlippe traft,
trænt te Sort i Sue;

Øbinø ©bn agete
tit Søtnerneø Sanb.

Jrijnt
38
Suøferneø Stjrfie : )
„SRejfer eter Sotner,
39
„reter ) oø ©ænfe,
Set fbat ta

„forer mig nu ta
„Sretja tit ©rnb,
„Øljorbø fagre Setter

„Srrefya atene
„fattebeø jeg enb !” 40)
Sittig om Abatte
font ter mange ©«fier,
og for Sotnerne
■01 tteb tåret frem,
åt ta S or

en

Øffe,

åtte Saffe,
atte te

Âræfe, 41 )

Äbinterne fïuïb’ tjabe;
4
Sorjfen ftuffeb «)

Sor

inet trente ©otter

©tjob.

Set fbat ta

Srtjm

Suøferneø Stjrfie:
„tjbor få' man ©rute
„tetre tage til jfg?
„Stttrig få' jeg ©rute
43
„tetre at få ©fat, )
„atbrig nogen ©lo
„mere ©Ijot at briffe.
Sen fnitte 44 ) Semte

tjnn fat terfjoø,
og ubfanbt ©bar

„fra SQoatune!
„(Sange fjer tit ©årten

fni Sotncnø Sate:
„Sretja ©lat ei fif

„gutbtjorneb’ dîoer,
„futforte Øffne
„Sotnen tit ©ammen ;

„fire fitfie Sogn, )
„få rafet tjnn nf Sængfet
„efter Rejfen bit.

45

37

the

)
his chariot),
) both the he-goats (viz. that used to draw
3e
the supposed bride.
with
he
them
saw
as
viz,
trace.
ooming
)
41
40
a9
) sweetmeats,
) I vvps wanting as yet.
) spread, cover.
44
43
42
cat.
) inge)
) quenched,
pastry-work [dainties ed],
45
and
nions.
nights (j).
) days
G

POETICAL

>$an 4G) lubeb unber Sin, 47)

I^fleb

at

ftjêfe,

Sort fovfccrbet
för Dem gjennem ©den:

men

„Dbi

er

få ffarfte

„ben ©fjijrtne? QSItffe
„31b mig føne?
„nf >Ôj;nene brættbe.”

®et fbab ba

SrDrn,
SuSferrteS Stufte,
„23ærer inb jammeren
„aSrubcn at bie,
„lægger SStjøIner 52)
„i altøen? ©fjøb,
54
„efter 33or? 53 ) ©fiffe )
„bier 55 ) c? nu fammen.’’

$en

Sorribe? >§u

fnilbe Xærne
Dun fnb berD>oS,

to i

ubfanbt ©bar

og

arme

48

jammeren fjenbte;
Srolbene?

SDrfle,
Stfmi, flog Dan førft,
Dele Sætten?

og

3dt

Dan fnufte.

$ræbte? og ben

)

Søtne ©öfter,

ufle

3øtne=@øfler,

=

og bobeb at bebe

49

fom Debet Dabbe
om aSrubegabe:

)

50

aSrubebenge. )
„3Hæf mig be røbe
„Stinge af bin å?ånb,
„Døiå bu bil oinbe
„mit SSenffaO Delt,
„mit Dele SßeufTaü
„min å?Dfbefi 51 ) tilfulbe!”

om

Dan? tBr^ft,
Dårbmobig <f?elt

ba

t>à 3øtnen? S'aie:
„5rel;a ©ømt ej ftf
„fire fîbfte $>ôgn,
„få rafeb I;un af Seengfel
„efter Steifen fub."
3nb font ben

155

EXTRACTS,

Dun fif ©fruD

for ©filtinger, 5e )
og <£>atnmer>4?ug
for Dele Sßenge; 5T)

få

fom Dbin? ©ön

atter tit

fin jammer.

47
) ducked with his head under the veil.
) He, the Giant.
49
50
5,
) sorry, miserable.
) dared to beg.
) bride-gifts.
)af52
feetion.
) the erusher, the liante of the maltet. 53 ) the God54
dess of marriage.
) the ceremonies, manners. 45 ) consecrate,
56
in
wedlock.
) euffs for coins; Skrub is here a
especially join
4G

48

collective noun,
liter,

whole

Skillinger

are

we

say also

money,

i,

considered

en

Skrub,

e.

large silver

as

fractions

or

a

blow,

57

) hele Penge,

gold-coins,
fragments.
or

of which

m

